VW Passat b8 Body Repairs Interior Eng

Service
Workshop Manual
Passat 2015 ➤
Passat 2019 ➤
Passat Variant 2015 ➤
Passat Variant 2019 ➤
General body repairs, interior
Edition 09.2019
Service Department. Technical Information

Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups
Repair Group
00 - Technical data
68 - Interior equipment
69 - Passenger protection
70 - Trim, insulation
72 - Seat frames
74 - Seat - padding, covers
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
Passat 2015 ➤ , Passat 2019 ➤ , Passat Variant 2015 ➤ , Passat Variant ...
General body repairs, interior - Edition 09.2019
Contents
00 - Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Safety measures when working on vehicles with a start/stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Safety measures when working with pyrotechnic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Storage, transportation and disposal of airbag, belt tensioner and battery isolator units
(pyrotechnic components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Additional safety regulations for side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Additional safety instructions for curtain airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.6 Safety regulations for crash sensors (pressure sensors) for front side airbags . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7 Renewing pyrotechnic, electrical and mechanical components of the restraint system after
an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.8 Checking airbag securing parts after an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.9 Accident without airbag triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.10 Checking seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.11 Check belt webbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.12 Checking inertia reel (locking mechanism) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.13 Visually checking belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.14 Check operation of belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.15 Checking belt relays, and buckle tongues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.16 Checking securing parts and anchorage points after an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.17 Checking seat belt restraint function for holding additional child seats (not for driver's seat
belt) - country-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.18 Checking child seat anchors after an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Repair notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1 Contact corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Pipe/wire routing and attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
68 - Interior equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1 Compartments/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - storage compartments/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2 Assembly overview - driver side dash panel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3 Assembly overview - steering column trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5 Assembly overview - storage compartment in headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.6 Removing and installing dash panel cover on driver side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.7 Removing and installing upper steering column trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.8 Removing and installing lower steering column trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.9 Removing and installing glove compartment opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.10 Service position for glove compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.11 Removing and installing damper element for glove compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.12 Removing and installing glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.13 Removing and installing glove compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.14 Removing and installing headliner storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1 Assembly overview- net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2 Assembly overview - sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 Removing and installing net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4 Removing and installing net partition mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.5 Removing and installing bracket for net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.6 Removing and installing eyelet for net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.7 Removing and installing sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.8 Removing and installing sun visor centre mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.9 Removing and installing roof grab handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Contents i
2.10 Removing and installing bracket for roof grab handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.1 Removing and installing front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.2 Removing and installing rear centre console trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3 Removing and installing centre console trim in front footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4 Removing and installing trim for operating and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5 Removing and installing front centre console storage compartment, Passat 2015► and
Passat Estate 2015► . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.6 Removing and installing centre console insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.7 Removing and installing centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.8 Removing and installing centre console bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4 Front centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.1 Removing and installing front centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5 On inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.1 Assembly overview - interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.2 Removing and installing interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.1 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror, basic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.2 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror, optional equipment version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
69 - Passenger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.2 Assembly overview - front three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.3 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1.4 Assembly overview - rear centre three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.5 Assembly overview - front belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.6 Assembly overview - rear belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.7 Removing and installing front three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.8 Removing and installing rear three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.9 Removing and installing front belt guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.10 Removing and installing rear belt guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.11 Removing and installing front belt end fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.12 Removing and installing rear outer belt end fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.13 Removing and installing belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.14 Removing and installing front belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.15 Removing and installing rear belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2 Child seat anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.1 Assembly overview - rear child seat anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.2 Removing and installing guide for ISOFIX child seat anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.3 Removing and installing cover for Top Tether child seat anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4 Airbag control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.1 Assembly overview - airbag control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.2 Removing and installing airbag control unit J234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5 Battery isolator igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.1 Assembly overview - battery isolator igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.2 Removing and installing battery isolator igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6 Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.1 Assembly overview - driver side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.2 Removing and installing airbag unit with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.3 Renewing connector on airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7 Front passenger side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ii Contents
7.1 Assembly overview - front passenger side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

7.2 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag unit with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.3 Removing and installing key-operated switch to deactivate front passenger side airbag . . 125
7.4 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp K145 . . 126
8 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.1 Assembly overview - front side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.2 Assembly overview - rear side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.3 Removing and installing front side airbag with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.1 Assembly overview - curtain airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.2 Removing and installing curtain airbag with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10 Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.1 Assembly overview - knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.2 Removing and installing knee airbag with igniter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11 Airbag crash sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag crash sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.2 Removing and installing front airbag crash sensor, driver side G190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.3 Removing and installing front side airbag crash sensor G179 / G180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag crash sensor G256 / G257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12 Seat belt verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.1 Removing and installing Seat occupied sensor, front passenger side G128 . . . . . . . . . . 152
70 - Trim, insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

1 Front door trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.1 Assembly overview - front door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.2 Removing and installing trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1.3 Removing and installing front door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
1.4 Removing and installing front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2 Rear door trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.1 Assembly overview - rear door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.2 Assembly overview - sun blind for door window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.3 Removing and installing trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.4 Removing and installing rear door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.5 Removing and installing rear arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2.6 Removing and installing sun blind for door window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.7 Removing and installing eyelet for sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.1 Assembly overview - dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.2 Assembly overview - cover and trim for head-up display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.3 Removing and installing dash panel end cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.4 Removing and installing dash panel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.5 Removing and installing radio/navigation system blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.6 Removing and installing dash panel insert trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.7 Removing and installing dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.8 Removing and installing dash panel vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3.9 Removing and installing trim for head-up display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3.10 Removing and installing cover for head-up display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4 Central tube for dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.1 Assembly overview - central tube for dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.2 Removing and installing crash bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.3 Removing and installing dash panel cross member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5 Interior trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.1 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Contents iii
5.2 Assembly overview - sill panel moulding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

5.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.4 Assembly overview - B-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.5 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.6 Assembly overview - D-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.7 Assembly overview - wheel housing trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.8 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.9 Assembly overview - rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5.10 Assembly overview - sun blind for rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.11 Removing and installing sill panel moulding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.12 Removing and installing A-pillar gap cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.13 Removing and installing A-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.14 Removing and installing B-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.15 Removing and installing C-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.16 Removing and installing D-pillar trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5.17 Removing and installing wheel housing trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.18 Removing and installing foot rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.19 Removing and installing floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5.20 Removing and installing rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.21 Removing and installing sun blind for rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.22 Removing and installing rear roller blind motor -V91- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.23 Removing and installing rear roller blind control unit -J262- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6 Luggage compartment trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
6.1 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
6.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.3 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.4 Assembly overview - upper rear lid trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.5 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.6 Removing and installing luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
6.7 Removing and installing lock carrier trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6.8 Removing and installing fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
6.9 Removing and installing support for luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6.10 Removing and installing luggage compartment side trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.11 Removing and installing upper rear lid trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.12 Removing and installing lower rear lid trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7 Roof trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.1 Assembly overview - moulded headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.2 Removing and installing roof end strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.3 Removing and installing moulded headlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.4 Installing roof reinforcement to body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
72 - Seat frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

1 Overview of seat variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.1 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.2 Assembly overview - front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
2.3 Assembly overview - front backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
2.4 Assembly overview - seat pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
2.5 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
2.6 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
2.7 Assembly overview - seat depth adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
2.8 Assembly overview - fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
2.9 Removing and installing front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
2.10 Removing front seat if seat longitudinal adjustment motor V28 / V31 is defective . . . . . . . . 331
iv Contents
2.11 Connecting and disconnecting airbag adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

2.12 Removing and installing seat trim on tunnel side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.13 Removing and installing seat trim on sill side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2.14 Removing and installing bracket for seat trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
2.15 Removing and installing front backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
2.16 Removing and installing manually adjustable lumbar support frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
2.17 Removing and installing seat depth adjustment unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
2.18 Removing and installing seat rake adjustment unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
2.19 Removing and installing handle for seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
2.20 Removing and installing seat height adjustment unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
2.21 Removing and installing lower seat pan frame with seat longitudinal adjustment motor V28 /
V31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
2.22 Removing and installing backrest adjustment unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
2.23 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
2.24 Removing and installing head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2.25 Removing and installing head restraint guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
2.26 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment switch E176 / E177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
2.27 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment motor V125 / V126 / V129 / V130 . . 365
2.28 Removing and installing seat adjustment operating unit E470 / E471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
2.29 Removing and installing massage control unit J740 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
2.30 Removing and installing seat and steering column adjustment control unit with memory J136
...................................................................... 368
2.31 Removing and installing impact and stabbing protector in backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
3 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
3.1 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
3.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
3.3 Assembly overview - locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
3.4 Assembly overview - centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
3.5 Assembly overview - side padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
3.6 Assembly overview - remote release mechanism for rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
3.7 Removing and installing bench seat / individual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
3.8 Removing and installing integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
3.9 Removing and installing rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
3.10 Removing and installing trim for locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
3.11 Removing and installing locking mechanism for rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
3.12 Removing and installing cover frame for pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
3.13 Removing and installing lid for pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
3.14 Removing and installing centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
3.15 Removing and installing head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
3.16 Removing and installing head restraint guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
3.17 Removing and installing side padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
3.18 Disconnecting and connecting Bowden cable for remote release mechanism of rear seat
backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
3.19 Removing and installing operating handle for remote release mechanism of rear seat
backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
3.20 Removing and installing Bowden cable for remote release mechanism of rear seat
backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
74 - Seat - padding, covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

1 Front seat covers and padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
1.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1.4 Removing and installing cover and padding for seat pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1.5 Removing and installing backrest cover and backrest padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
1.6 Separating cover and padding on seat pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
1.7 Separating cover and padding on backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Contents v
1.8 Removing and installing seat heating element Z6 / Z8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

1.9 Removing and installing backrest heating element Z7 / Z9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
2 Rear seat covers and padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
2.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
2.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest cover and padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
2.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
2.4 Removing and installing bench seat cover and padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
2.5 Removing and installing rear seat backrest cover and padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
2.6 Removing and installing cover and padding for squab with integrated child seat . . . . . . . . 427
2.7 Removing and installing push button with trim for adjusting mechanism of child seat . . . . 429
2.8 Removing and installing intermediate padding, backrest with pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
2.9 Separating cover and padding for rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
2.10 Separating cover and padding for rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
2.11 Removing and installing seat heating element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
2.12 Removing and installing backrest heating element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
vi Contents
00 – Technical data
1 Safety information
(VRL013487; Edition 09.2019)
1. Safety information 1
⇒ “1.1 Safety measures when working on vehicles with a start/

stop system”, page 2
⇒ “1.2 Safety measures when working with pyrotechnic compo‐
nents”, page 3
⇒ “1.3 Storage, transportation and disposal of airbag, belt ten‐
sioner and battery isolator units (pyrotechnic components)”, page
4
⇒ “1.4 Additional safety regulations for side airbag”, page 5
⇒ “1.5 Additional safety instructions for curtain airbag”,
page 5
⇒ “1.6 Safety regulations for crash sensors (pressure sensors) for
front side airbags”, page 6
⇒ “1.7 Renewing pyrotechnic, electrical and mechanical compo‐
nents of the restraint system after an accident”, page 6
⇒ “1.8 Checking airbag securing parts after an accident”,
page 8
⇒ “1.9 Accident without airbag triggering”, page 8
⇒ “1.10 Checking seat belts”, page 8
⇒ “1.11 Check belt webbing”, page 9
⇒ “1.12 Checking inertia reel (locking mechanism)”, page 10
⇒ “1.13 Visually checking belt buckle”, page 11
⇒ “1.14 Check operation of belt buckle”, page 11
⇒ “1.15 Checking belt relays, and buckle tongues”, page 11
⇒ “1.16 Checking securing parts and anchorage points after an
accident”, page 11
⇒ “1.17 Checking seat belt restraint function for holding additional
child seats (not for driver's seat belt) - country-specific”,
page 12
⇒ “1.18 Checking child seat anchors after an accident”,
page 12
1.1 Safety measures when working on ve‐

hicles with a start/stop system
When working on vehicles with start/stop system, observe the
following:
WARNING
Risk of injury due to automatic engine starting in vehicles with

a start/stop system.
♦ In vehicles with an activated start/stop system (indicated
by a message in the dash panel insert), the engine may
start automatically.
♦ When working on the vehicle, make sure that the start/stop
system is deactivated (switch off the ignition; switch the
ignition on again if necessary).
2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

1.2 Safety measures when working with py‐

rotechnic components
Note
The following are pyrotechnic components:
♦ Airbag units
♦ Belt tensioner
♦ Belt force limiters (depending on vehicle equipment level)
♦ Battery isolation elements (depending on vehicle equipment
level)
General notes
♦ Testing, removing, installing and repair work may only be per‐
formed by qualified personnel.
♦ There are no replacement intervals for airbag units.
♦ Under no circumstances should checks be carried out with a
test lamp, voltmeter or ohmmeter.
♦ Pyrotechnic components may only be checked in installed
state and with vehicle diagnosis, testing and information sys‐
tems approved by the manufacturer.
♦ When working on pyrotechnic components and airbag control
unit - J234- , battery earth strap must be disconnected with
ignition switched ON. Then, cover the negative terminal.
♦ A waiting time of 10 seconds is necessary after disconnecting
the battery.
♦ Battery must be connected with ignition SWITCHED ON.
When doing this, there should be no-one inside the vehicle.
♦ If the ignition has not yet been switched on after the battery
has been reconnected “warning lamps in dash panel insert are
off”, the ignition (key or button) must only be switched on while
sitting on the driver seat and with the seat set to rearmost po‐
sition.
♦ Observe required procedures after connecting battery ⇒ Elec‐
trical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery; Disconnecting and con‐
necting battery .
♦ Before handling pyrotechnic components of the restraint sys‐
tem, for example before separating an electrical connection,
the mechanic must electrostatically discharge himself/herself.
Electrostatic discharge is achieved by touching earthed met‐
allic parts, such as the door striker plate.
♦ Wash hands after coming into contact with triggered pyrotech‐
nic components of restraint system.
♦ Pyrotechnic components must not be opened or repaired; al‐
ways use new parts (risk of injury).
♦ Pyrotechnic components that have been dropped onto a hard
surface or show signs of damage must not be installed in a
vehicle.
♦ Pyrotechnic components must be installed immediately after
they have been removed from their packaging.
♦ If work is interrupted, the pyrotechnic component must be
stored back in its packaging.
♦ Leaving the pyrotechnic component unattended is prohibited.
♦ When connecting pyrotechnic components of the restraint

system, only the person carrying out the work may be inside
the vehicle.
♦ Pyrotechnic components must not come into contact with
grease, cleaning solution or similar.
♦ The airbag units must be renewed if any contamination such
as oil, grease, paint or solvent penetrates the fabric.
♦ Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to tempera‐
tures above 100°C, even for short periods.
Special instructions for driver and front passenger airbags
♦ Removed driver and front passenger airbag units must be
stored with padded side upwards.
It is essential to carry out work in the following sequence when
renewing airbag units:
1- Remove old airbag unit and place to one side with padded
side upwards.
2- Remove new airbag unit from transport packaging and place
to one side with padded side upwards.
3- Immediately place old airbag unit in transport packaging.
4- Install new airbag unit in vehicle.
Special instructions for belt tensioners
♦ Belt tensioner units must be handled with extreme caution
during removal and installation. If handled incorrectly, there is
a high risk of injury and damage in relation to the belt tensioner
units.
♦ Belt tensioner units which are mechanically damaged (dents,
fractures) always must be renewed.
♦ Never point open end of belt tensioner at another person.
♦ When connecting the belt tensioner unit, all mechanical parts
(including those of the 3-point seat belt) must be properly at‐
tached. If connection of the belt tensioner unit is hindered due
to tight conditions, the belt strap must be rolled up completely
before connecting. In this case there is no heightened risk of
safety as long as the additional safety instructions are heeded.
Essentially this is aimed at battery disconnection and electro‐
static discharge of the mechanic prior to connection of the belt
tensioner unit.
♦ Depending on the crash intensity, it is possible that the belt
tensioner was triggered but the belt force limiter did NOT ig‐
nite. These parts are to be treated as unignited components!
1.3 Storage, transportation and disposal of

airbag, belt tensioner and battery isola‐
tor units (pyrotechnic components)
♦ Storage must comply with the relevant national legislation.
♦ Transportation is subject to national and international regula‐
tions that govern packaging, marking, labelling and freight
documentation in detail.
♦ Untriggered pyrotechnic components must be disposed of
correctly in the original packaging in accordance with national
legislation. Contact the responsible importer if there is any
doubt.
♦ Only completely ignited pyrotechnic components may be dis‐
posed of through the commercial waste system.

WARNING
♦ This does not apply to belt tensioners which are operated

by a Wankel type pump. Those must be disposed of like
pyrotechnic components which were not triggered (e.g.
airbags, seat belts, pyrotechnic battery isolators).
♦ Reason: On belt tensioners which are operated by a Wan‐
kel type pump it is not possible to verify, using workshop
means, if all igniters have been triggered.
1.4 Additional safety regulations for side air‐

bag
♦ Under no circumstances may seat covers be fitted which have
not been specifically approved for use on Volkswagen seats
with side airbags.
♦ The backrest padding must not be cut out in the area of the
side airbag.
♦ When installing, make sure that the seam in the area of the
side airbag is straight.
♦ All padding clips (metal and plastic clips) must be renewed.
♦ When installing, all padding clips must be fitted in the same
positions as the original ones.
♦ If the seat cover fabric is damaged (tears, burn marks, etc.) in
the vicinity of the side airbag, the cover must always be re‐
placed for safety reasons, as otherwise the side airbag will not
inflate properly.
♦ Repairs may not be carried out on the backrest cover in the
area of the side airbag (because of the special thread and
precisely defined seam).
♦ Renew the backrest padding after the side airbags have been
triggered.
♦ All damaged components must be renewed after an accident.
The original airbag unit can still be used if no signs of damage
are found.
♦ If side airbag units are renewed, the sticker for the airbag
number must be removed from the new side airbag unit and
stuck over the old sticker on the seat pan.
♦ Never poke upholstery needles or any other sharp objects
through the seat cover fabric in the vicinity of the airbag, seat
occupied sensor, front passenger side - G128- and the seat
occupied sensor mat.
1.5 Additional safety instructions for curtain

airbag
♦ Inspect trims for damage prior to installing them.
♦ Always renew damaged pillar trims; never repair.
♦ Ensure proper seating of trims when installing them.
♦ When performing repair work behind the curtain airbag, al‐
ways remove the entire module.
♦ To prevent any potential damage during removal and instal‐
lation, curtain airbags must be handled with extreme caution.
♦ Place removed curtain airbag modules in packaging or on a
clean, flat surface on a cover.
♦ After body repairs in vicinity of curtain airbag, check body for

weld spray droplets, deformations and areas of chafing (com‐
pare with opposite side).
♦ Until the gas generator is screwed in place, you must always
hold it firmly by hand when handling (transportation, removal
and installation etc.).
♦ Never twist, kink, throw, shake, pull, hang, squeeze, press,
pinch or clamp any curtain airbag modules.
♦ Folding is acceptable as long as no damage is caused (in par‐
ticular to the protective sleeve).
1.6 Safety regulations for crash sensors

(pressure sensors) for front side airbags
The side airbag crash sensors respond to changes in pressure
and must therefore be treated with particular caution. Observe the
following:
♦ The correct installation position is vitally important: install only
in the specified location in the door.
♦ Protect the crash sensor against mechanical shocks and im‐
pacts: any crash sensors which have been dropped must no
longer be used. Remove the crash sensor when carrying out
bodywork on the door.
♦ The crash sensor is matched to the volume of air inside the
door: deformation of the door, resulting in a reduction in the
air space in the door, impairs the function of the crash sensor.
♦ Avoid any major soiling of the crash sensor: do not use com‐
pressed air in the vicinity of the crash sensor. Protect the crash
sensor against swarf from filing or drilling (example, during
retrofitting of door speakers). Do not use cavity sealants or
spray oil in the vicinity of the crash sensor.
♦ Protect against heat/cold: avoid heat effects, for example dur‐
ing spray painting or other body shop operations. The crash
sensors must not be exposed to temperatures below -40°C
(for example in aircraft holds without air conditioning).
♦ The crash sensor must be protected against humidity during
storage and installation.
For the crash sensor to function properly, it is vital to ensure that
the door forms an effective seal after being fitted. Observe the
following:
♦ All components (e.g. cover, speakers, door trim) must be cor‐
rectly fitted.
♦ The door trim retaining clips seal the system. If necessary, re‐
new retaining clips.
1.7 Renewing pyrotechnic, electrical and

mechanical components of the restraint
system after an accident
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle diagnostic tester
The airbag control unit must be renewed:
♦ If the display “Control unit defective” appears when the event
memory is read
♦ After 3 deployments of the side airbag/driver airbag/front pas‐
senger airbag and/or belt tensioner

♦ In the event of damage to the housing

♦ In the event of deformation to the tunnel within a 200 mm ra‐
dius of the control unit
Always renew the following:
♦ All triggered airbag units.
Additionally, in the event of the front passenger airbag being trig‐
gered:
♦ Dash panel
♦ Supports of front passenger airbag unit which have been bent
out of shape (must not be bent back into shape)
♦ All sensors for front airbag at front end
♦ Remaining sensors for lateral acceleration in event of defor‐
mation of attachment points in vicinity of sensors
Additionally, in the event of the driver airbag being triggered:
♦ Return spring with slip ring
♦ All sensors for front airbag at front end
Additionally, in the event of the side airbag being triggered:
♦ Pressure sensors on the triggered side
♦ Lateral acceleration sensors on the side affected
♦ Seat cover
♦ Padding
♦ In case of folding backrest: side padding (if fitted)
Additionally:
♦ All belt inertia reels with triggered belt tensioners
♦ All belt inertia reels with triggered belt tensioners
♦ Belt buckles for all belt inertia reels with triggered belt ten‐
sioners and seat belt engaged
♦ Belt height adjuster (mechanical and electrical) for all belt in‐
ertia reels with triggered belt tensioners and seat belt engaged
– If you suspect that belt tensioners or belt force limiters have
been triggered, connect a vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Under “15 - Airbag” in »Guided Fault Finding« check whether
there is a crash entry logged for the airbag control unit.
– At the same time check whether the “Resistance too high” fault
is also logged for belt tensioners and/or belt force limiters.
Triggered belt tensioners and/or belt force limiters have to
meet both conditions. “Prerequisite: The airbag control unit
has not yet been renewed”.
Note
♦ The “Resistance too high” fault can also be logged in the event
of a cable break. Under normal circumstances, no crash entry
is then logged.
♦ Depending on the crash intensity, it is possible that the belt
tensioner was triggered but »NOT« the belt force limiter. Ob‐
serve notes on disposal of pyrotechnic components
⇒ page 4 .
♦ In addition, note the section: Checking seat belts
⇒ page 8 .
– If parts of the belt system are removed because of an accident,

the belt system bolts must be renewed.
– In addition, the following must also be replaced if necessary
(visual check): all damaged components.
1.8 Checking airbag securing parts after an

accident
All damaged securing parts must always be renewed. It is not
permissible to bend the components back into shape or »make
them fit«
The following components must be checked after the relevant
airbag has been triggered.
In the event of the front passenger airbag being triggered:
♦ Central tube for dash panel; it must be possible to install the
supports for the front passenger airbag and front passenger
airbag unit tension-free. Otherwise the central tube must also
be renewed.
♦ Check the glove compartment for damage. Renew it if dam‐
aged.
In the event of the driver airbag being triggered:
♦ Steering wheel: remove the steering wheel and place on a flat
surface together with the steering collar. The full face of the
steering collar must be in contact with the flat surface. Other‐
wise the steering wheel must be renewed.
♦ Check steering wheel for smoke residues. If any smoke resi‐
dues are found, the steering wheel must be renewed.
1.9 Accident without airbag triggering

♦ If airbag warning lamp - K75- does not indicate a fault, there
is no requirement to renew pyrotechnic components. The seat
belts should be checked separately.
1.10 Checking seat belts
WARNING
The seat belt system must be inspected systematically after

every accident! If damage is determined at any of the points to
be checked, customer must be informed regarding necessity
of changing belts.
Points to check
♦ Check belt webbing ⇒ page 9 .

♦ Check inertia reel (locking mechanism) ⇒ page 10 .

♦ Visually check belt buckle ⇒ page 11 .
♦ Check operation of belt buckle ⇒ page 11 .
♦ Check belt guide fittings and latch plates ⇒ page 11 .
♦ Check securing parts and anchorage points ⇒ page 11 .
♦ Checking seat belt restraint function for holding additional
child seats (not for driver seat belt) - country-specific
⇒ page 12 .
Caution
If the customer refuses to have a damaged seat belt renewed,

an appropriate comment should be made in the service notes.
1.11 Check belt webbing

Procedure
– Pull belt completely out of inertia reel or lap belt adjustment
plate.
– Check belt webbing for soiling, and if necessary wash with a
mild soapy solution ⇒ Owner's Manual .
• If either of the types of damage illustrated below (1 and 2) are

determined on accident vehicle, renew seat belt complete with
belt buckle.
• If damage as illustrated under points 1, 2, 3 and/or 4 is deter‐
mined on a vehicle which has not been involved in an accident,
it is sufficient to renew damaged belt only.
• 1 - Belt webbing cut, torn or chafed.
• 2 - Torn webbing loops on belt edge.
• 3 - Burns caused by cigarettes or similar.
• 4 - One edge of belt deformed or wavy.
1.12 Checking inertia reel (locking mecha‐

nism)
The inertia reel has two locking functions.
♦ The first locking function is triggered by the belt being jerked
out of the reel (belt extension acceleration).
Test 1
– Pull belt out of inertia reel with firm jerk.
• Will not lock - renew seat belt complete with buckle.
• If difficulties are experienced when belt is extended or retrac‐
ted, first check whether position of inertia reel has been al‐
tered.
• The second locking function is triggered by a change in vehicle
speed (vehicle-dependent locking function).
Test 2
WARNING
For safety reasons, the road test should be carried out on a

traffic-free stretch to ensure that other road users are not en‐
dangered.
– Put on seat belt.

– Accelerate vehicle to 20 km/h and then carry out emergency
braking with foot brake.
• If seat belt is not locked by locking mechanism during braking
procedure, renew seat belt complete with buckle.

1.13 Visually checking belt buckle

– Inspect belt buckle for cracks and chips.
• If damage is determined, renew seat belt complete with belt
buckle.
1.14 Check operation of belt buckle

Checking belt buckle
– Push buckle tongue into belt buckle until it engages audibly.
Check whether locking mechanism is properly engaged by
pulling firmly on belt webbing.
• If buckle tongue fails even once to engage properly in belt
buckle during at least 5 tests, renew seat belt complete with
belt buckle.
Checking release mechanism
– Release seat belt by pressing button on belt buckle with finger
pressure. When belt is slack, latch plate must spring out of belt
buckle on its own.
• Carry out test at least 5 times. If buckle tongue fails even once
to spring out of buckle, renew seat belt complete with belt
buckle.
WARNING
Under no circumstances whatsoever may lubricant be used to

eliminate noise or stiffness in belt buckle buttons.
1.15 Checking belt relays, and buckle

tongues
Plastic-coated fittings show fine, parallel scoring after stress on
belt system (when belt was fastened during accident). (On the
other hand, wear caused by frequent belt use can be recognized
by smooth wear, free of lines.)
– Inspect for deformation, fracturing and cracks in plastic.
• If scoring and/or damage is determined, renew seat belt com‐
plete with belt latch.
1.16 Checking securing parts and anchorage

points after an accident
♦ Latch plate deformed (stretched)
♦ Height adjustment does not function.
♦ Anchorage points (seat, pillars, underbody) distorted or thread
damaged
• If damage is determined on these parts, renew seat belt com‐
plete with belt buckle.
• If parts of the belt system are removed because of an accident,
the belt system securing bolts must be renewed.
• Renew anchorage points.
Note
In the case of damage resulting not from an accident but, for ex‐
ample, from wear, only the part which is actually damaged need
be renewed.
1.17 Checking seat belt restraint function for

holding additional child seats (not for
driver's seat belt) - country-specific
For the functional check, all seat belt components including the
side trim must be installed.
Activating the restraint function
♦ Pull out seat belt webbing completely to stop.
Correct function
♦ The belt must retract with an audible noise.
♦ If the belt retraction is stopped, it should not be possible to pull
the belt out again until the function is deactivated.
Deactivating
♦ Allow the belt to retract as far as the last 100 mm (approx.).
♦ The restraint function must switch off at the latest when
100 mm of the seat belt webbing are still pulled out. The belt
then works normally again.
If the seat belt restraint function for holding additional child seats
does not work properly, the seat belt must be renewed.
1.18 Checking child seat anchors after an ac‐

cident
Points to check
♦ Child seat anchors must be checked for damage and defor‐
mation after an accident.
♦ Child seat anchors welded to the body or the seats/backrests
or bolted in place may not be repaired or straightened.
♦ Child seat anchors bolted to the body or the seats/backrests
must be renewed in the event of damage or deformation.
♦ Child seat anchor securing bolts must be renewed if the brack‐
et is damaged.

2 Repair notes
⇒ “2.1 Contact corrosion”, page 13
⇒ “2.2 Pipe/wire routing and attachment”, page 13
2.1 Contact corrosion

Contact corrosion can occur if unsuitable fastening elements
(screws, bolts, nuts, washers) are used.
For this reason, only connecting elements with a special surface
coating have been fitted.
In addition, rubber, plastic and adhesives are made of non-con‐
ductive materials.
If in doubt as to whether parts can be reused, use new parts ⇒
Electronic parts catalogue .
Observe the following:
♦ It is recommended to use genuine parts which are tested and
compatible with aluminium.
♦ The use of VW parts is recommended.
♦ Damage resulting from contact corrosion is not covered by the
warranty.
2.2 Pipe/wire routing and attachment

If hydraulic, pneumatic or electrical wires are to be disconnected
or removed and then reinstalled, make drawings or take photos.
This guarantees that everything is re-installed in its original posi‐
tion.
2. Repair notes 13
68 – Interior equipment
1 Compartments/covers
⇒ “1.1 Overview of fitting locations - storage compartments/cov‐
ers”, page 14
⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - driver side dash panel cover”,
page 16
⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - steering column trim”, page 17
⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment”, page 18
⇒ “1.5 Assembly overview - storage compartment in headliner”,
page 19
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing dash panel cover on driver side”,
page 19
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing upper steering column trim”, page
22
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing lower steering column trim”, page
22
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing glove compartment opener”, page
24
⇒ “1.10 Service position for glove compartment lid”, page 26
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing damper element for glove com‐
partment lid”, page 27
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing glove compartment”, page 27
⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing glove compartment cover”, page
29
⇒ “1.14 Removing and installing headliner storage compartment”,
page 30
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - storage compartments/covers
14 Rep. gr.68 - Interior equipment

1 - Dash panel
❑ Assembly overview
⇒ page 175 .
2 - Glove compartment
⇒ page 18 .
3 - Centre console
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 52
4 - Steering column trim
⇒ page 17 .
upper steering column
trim ⇒ page 22
lower steering column
trim ⇒ page 22
5 - Driver side dash panel cov‐
er
⇒ page 16 .
1. Compartments/covers 15
1.2 Assembly overview - driver side dash panel cover
1 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
2 - Clip
❑ Qty. 2
3 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Driver side dash panel cov‐
er
⇒ page 19

1.3 Assembly overview - steering column trim
1 - Dash panel
⇒ page 175 .
2 - Gap cover, upper steering
column trim
❑ Clipped into upper
steering column trim
3 - Upper steering column trim
⇒ page 22
❑ Press until it audibly en‐
gages
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 2.5 Nm
5 - Bolt
❑ 2.5 Nm
6 - Lower steering column trim
⇒ page 22
7 - Steering column switch
module
❑ Assembly overview ⇒
Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 94 ; Steering column
switch module; Assem‐
bly overview - steering
column switch module
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment
1 - Glove compartment
⇒ page 27
2 - Damper element
❑ For glove compartment
lid.
❑ With glove compart‐
ment light switch - E26- .
⇒ page 27
3 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 6
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Glove compartment lid
⇒ page 29
5 - Glove compartment opener
⇒ page 24

1.5 Assembly overview - storage compartment in headliner
1 - Storage compartment
⇒ page 30
2 - Cover
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Front interior light - WX1-
❑ Overview of fitting loca‐
tions ⇒ Electrical sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Lights; Overview of fit‐
ting locations - lights in
roof trim .
1.6 Removing and installing dash panel

cover on driver side
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1783-
Removing
– Switch off ignition.

– Unscrew bolt -1-.
– Remove clips -2-.
– Remove dash panel cover on driver side -4- from dash panel.
– Disconnect electrical connector of footwell light.
Installing
Note
Before installing, check all fasteners for damage and renew if

necessary.
If the dash panel trim on driver side is replaced by a new part,

make two cut-outs into the base carrier of the dash panel.

– Use appropriate workshop equipment to make two cut-outs

into the base carrier in accordance with the following dimen‐
sions:
♦ a = 13 mm
♦ b = 8 mm
♦ c = 24 mm
♦ d = 8 mm
♦ e = 3.5 mm
♦ f = 10 mm
♦ Radius R = 3.25 mm
– Install a “speed nut” in the cut-outs; for allocation refer to ⇒
Electronic parts catalogue .
– Connect electrical connector of footwell light.
– Insert dash panel trim on driver side, and use a bolt to secure
it to additional speed nut.
Further assembly is carried out in the reverse order.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - driver side dash panel cover”,
page 16
1.7 Removing and installing upper steering

column trim
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-
Removing
– Release steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
– Pull out steering wheel completely, push it down and fix it in
place.
– Release gap cover for dash panel insert from mountings on
dash panel insert -arrows A- using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Release upper steering column trim -1- from mountings of
lower steering column trim -arrow B- and -arrow C-. To do this,
turn steering wheel accordingly.
– Detach upper steering column trim from lower steering column
trim, and remove it together with gap cover for dash panel in‐
sert.
Installing
Note

necessary.
Install in reverse order of removal.
1.8 Removing and installing lower steering

column trim

Removing
– Remove upper steering column trim ⇒ page 22 .
– If necessary, remove ignition key.
– Unscrew bolts -1- from lower steering column trim. To do this,

turn steering wheel accordingly.
– Remove lower steering column trim -2- from steering column.
– On vehicles with keyless locking and starting system discon‐

nect connector for immobiliser reader coil - D2- .
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - steering column trim”, page 17
1.9 Removing and installing glove compart‐

ment opener
Removing
– Open glove compartment.
– Unscrew bolt -1- and remove unlocking button -2- from glove
compartment cover.

Installing
Installation is carried out in reverse order.
Torque settings
Component Torque setting
Release button on glove com‐ 1.5 Nm
partment lid
1.10 Service position for glove compartment

lid
Moving to service position
• Glove compartment cover -2- opened.
– Push limit stops -1- for glove compartment lid -2- upwards
-arrows A-.
– Carefully open glove compartment cover -2- by approx. an‐
other 5 cm -arrow B-.
Caution
Do not open further than another 5 cm, because otherwise the

toothed rack of the braking element will be pulled out of the
damper element.
– Move/release rack -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove it

from glove compartment lid.
Caution
If the toothed rack -1- is pulled out of the damper element when
the “glove compartment cover is moved to the service posi‐
tion”, carefully fit it back into the damper element.
Note
If the braking element falls out of the damper element when the
“glove compartment cover is moved to the service position”, fit it
back into the damper element in the correct installation position.
Moving from service position

– Close glove compartment lid slowly.
– Close glove compartment lid further and engage it behind limit
stops.

1.11 Removing and installing damper ele‐

ment for glove compartment lid
Removing
– Move glove compartment lid to service position ⇒ page 26 .
– Disconnect electrical connector -2- on glove compartment light
switch - E26- -3-.
– Turn damper element -1- -arrow- by 90° (1/4 turn) and remove
it from glove compartment.
– Move/release rack -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove it

from glove compartment lid -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

ment
Removing
– If fitted, remove control unit 1 for information electronics -
J794- ⇒ Communication; Rep. gr. 91 ; Infotainment system;
Removing and installing control unit 1 for information elec‐
tronics - J794- .
– Unscrew bolts in footwell -2- and -4-.
– Open glove compartment cover -1-, and unscrew four bolts
-3-.
– Unclip glove compartment from dash panel and pull it out until
glove compartment cooling hose can be accessed.
– Pull glove compartment cooling hose off glove compartment.
– Disconnect any connectors from glove compartment, move
cable guides clear to one side, and remove glove compart‐
ment.

Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment”, page 18

ment cover
Removing
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ page 27 .
– Place glove compartment on a soft surface.
– Move glove compartment lid to service position ⇒ page 26 .
– Drive out left and right hinge pins -1- in -direction of arrow B-
using a drift.
– Remove glove compartment lid from glove compartment.
Installing
Note

necessary.
1.14 Removing and installing headliner stor‐

age compartment
Removing
– Unclip cover -1- from storage compartment in roof headliner
-3-.
– Remove front interior light - WX1- -2- ⇒ Electrical system;
Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights; Overview of fitting locations - lights in roof
trim .
– If necessary, remove interior mirror covers ⇒ page 61 .
– Unscrew bolts -1-.

– Remove storage compartment in roof headliner -2- from rein‐
forcing frame in moulded headliner -3-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.5 Assembly overview - storage compartment in headlin‐
er”, page 19

2 Equipment
⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview- net partition”, page 31
⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - sun visors”, page 33
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing net partition”, page 33
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing net partition mounting”,
page 34
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing bracket for net partition”,
page 34
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing eyelet for net partition”,
page 34
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing sun visor”, page 36
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing sun visor centre mount”,
page 37
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing roof grab handle”, page 38
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing bracket for roof grab handle”,
page 41
2.1 Assembly overview- net partition
1 - Net partition
⇒ page 33
2 - Bolt
❑ 4.5 Nm
3 - Remove fitting eye trim
❑ Allocation ⇒ Electronic
parts catalogue
⇒ page 34
4 - Eyelet for net partition
⇒ page 34
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 4.5 Nm
6 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
7 - Bracket for eyelet
parts catalogue
❑ Removing
– Remove moulded head‐
liner ⇒ page 287 .
– Unscrew bolts -5- and

remove bracket for eye‐
let.
8 - Bolt
❑ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly over‐
2. Equipment 31
view - rear outer three-

point seat belt”, page 83
9 - Bracket for net partition
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 34
10 - Rubber grommet
❑ Slide over bracket for net partition, and insert in luggage compartment side trim
11 - Support
❑ On right rear seat backrest (2/3)
12 - Insert
13 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
Note
♦ Clean remnants of locking fluid

from thread with a wire brush.
Then, fit bolts using locking fluid
(⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue ).
♦ Also clean locking fluid from
threaded holes (e.g. using
thread chaser).

2.2 Assembly overview - sun visors
Note
The assembly overview is shown for the driver side. The assembly overview for the front passenger side is
analogous.
1 - Sun visor
⇒ page 36
2 - Sun visor mount
❑ Cannot be separated
from sun visor.
3 - Centre bearing
❑ For sun visor
⇒ page 37
2.3 Removing and installing net partition

Removing
– Fold down both rear seat backrests.
– Pull net partition -1- towards right out of mountings -2- on right
rear seat backrest (2/3), and remove it.
Installing
– Insert guides of net partition -1- into mountings -2- on right rear
seat backrest (2/3).
– Push net partition towards left into mountings -2- on right rear
seat backrest (2/3) as far as it will go.
2. Equipment 33
2.4 Removing and installing net partition

mounting
Removing
– Remove net partition ⇒ page 33 .
– Remove insert -3- and mounting -1- from right rear seat back‐
rest (2/3).
Installing
Install in reverse order, noting the following:
Note
♦ Note installation position of insert -1- and mounting -2-.

♦ Secure mounting -2- in threaded holes on left.
♦ Fit locating lug on insert -1- into recess in mounting -2-.
♦ Clean remnants of locking fluid from thread with a wire brush.
Then, fit bolts using locking fluid (⇒ Electronic Parts Cata‐
logue ).
♦ Also clean locking fluid from threaded holes (e.g. using thread
chaser).
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview- net partition”, page 31
2.5 Removing and installing bracket for net

partition
Removing
– Remove luggage compartment side trim ⇒ page 274 .
– Pull belt webbing aside, and unscrew bolts -2-.
– Pull bracket for net partition -1- out of belt guide -3- -arrow-,
and remove it.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt”,
page 83
2.6 Removing and installing eyelet for net

partition

Removing
Eyelet for net partition, without rear reading light
Note
Removal and installation is described for the rear left eyelet for
net partition. Follow same instructions for the remaining eyelets
for net partition as appropriate.

– Release trim -1- with eyelet for net partition at bottom from
moulded headliner using removal wedge - 3409- -arrow A-.
– Then, slightly guide trim -1- with eyelet for net partition down‐
wards out of moulded headliner -arrow B-.
– After that, guide eyelet for net partition with trim upwards out
of moulded headliner, and remove it.
Note
On vehicles with sliding sunroof, the retaining lugs on the rear

trims -1- are reverted by 180°. The removal and installation pro‐
cedure for these eyelets for net partition must be adapted ac‐
cordingly.
Eyelet for net partition, with rear reading light
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left eyelet for net
partition. Follow same instructions for the right eyelet for net par‐
tition as appropriate.
– Remove rear left reading light - W11- ⇒ Electrical system;

Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights; Overview of fitting locations - lights in roof
trim .
– Release retaining lugs -3- on trim -1-, and release trim from
moulded headliner using removal wedge - 3409- -arrow A-.
– Then, slightly guide trim -1- with eyelet for net partition towards
front out of moulded headliner -arrow B-.
2. Equipment 35
Installing
Note
Ensure that the locating lug -arrow- on the bracket for net partition
is properly seated in the recess in the eyelet for net partition -1-.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview- net partition”, page 31
2.7 Removing and installing sun visor
Note
Removal and installation is described for the sun visor on driver

side. Follow same instructions for the front passenger side as ap‐
propriate.

♦ Release pliers - VAS 6427-
Removing
– Swing sun visor towards front.
– Detach sun visor -2- from centre mount -1-.
– Open caps -3- on sun visor mount.
Note
When carrying out the steps below, ensure that release pliers -
VAS 6427- are positioned centrally in retaining clips.

– Release front retaining clip -3- in sun visor mount -1- from body
mounting using release pliers - VAS 6427- .
– Hold sun visor in such a way that the retaining clip does not
engage again.
– Release rear retaining clip -3- in sun visor mount -1- from body
mounting using release pliers - VAS 6427- .
– Carefully remove sun visor -2- together with sun visor mount
-3- downwards from mounting in body. Remove transportation
lock.
– Pull wiring harness which is bonded to moulded headliner to‐
wards front. Disconnect connector and remove sun visor.
Note
Carefully pull wiring harness towards front taking care not to dam‐
age it. Use the wiring harness repair set - VAS 1978 B- to repair
the wiring harness. Lower the moulded headliner if required.
Installing
Note

necessary.
– Wrap electrical connector with one layer of foam tape.
– Fit a flat-bladed screwdriver on recess -arrow- and carefully

lever out light -1- for vanity mirror.
– Separate electrical connectors.
– Grasp with one finger through hole of light for vanity mirror and
slightly pull down moulded headliner.
– Push electrical connector between moulded headliner and
roof cross member towards rear by approx. 6 cm.
– Engage front retaining clip for sun visor mount in body mount‐
ing.
– Engage rear retaining clip for sun visor mount in body mount‐
ing.
– Ensure that both retaining clips are properly engaged in body.
2.8 Removing and installing sun visor cen‐

tre mount
Note
Removal and installation is described for the sun visor centre

mount on the driver side. Follow same instructions for the front
passenger side as appropriate.
2. Equipment 37
Removing
– Detach sun visor from sun visor centre mount and fold it aside.
– Turn sun visor centre mount -1- anti-clockwise -arrow- through
90° (1/4 turn).
– Remove sun visor centre mount -1- downwards.
Installing
2.9 Removing and installing roof grab han‐

dle
⇒ “2.9.2 Removing and installing roof grab handle”, page 39
⇒ “2.9.1 Assembly overview - roof grab handle”, page 38
2.9.1 Assembly overview - roof grab handle
Note
The assembly overview is shown for the front left roof grab handle. The assembly overview for the remaining
roof grab handle is analogous.

1 - Bracket for roof grab handle

⇒ page 41
2 - Spacer
❑ Clipped to roof grab
handle.
❑ Before reinstalling, en‐
sure that it is in the prop‐
er installation position
and correct if necessa‐
ry.
❑ It is not permissible to
leave out the spacer el‐
ement
3 - Moulded headliner
⇒ page 284
4 - Roof grab handle
⇒ page 38
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 4.5 Nm
2.9.2 Removing and installing roof grab han‐

dle
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left front roof grab
handle. Follow same instructions for the remaining roof grab han‐
dles as appropriate.
2. Equipment 39
♦ Release tool - T10517-
Removing
– Fold down roof grab handle -1- and remove caps -2-.
– Fold down roof grab handle -1- and push release tool -
T10517- into left retaining clip -arrow- as far as stop.
– Carefully pull on roof grab handle -1- in the area of the left
retaining clip.
– Unclip right retaining clip in the same way.

– The retaining clips -2- of roof grab handle -1- are now detached
from mountings in bracket for roof grab handle.
Note
♦ Perform the work step below only if the roof grab handle is to
be removed.
♦ For removing the moulded headliner the roof grab handle must
only be released from body mountings.
– Release locking lug -2- (at side) on both sides.

– Pull roof grab handle -1- downwards out of spacer element
-3-.
Installing
A spacer element is fitted beneath the roof grab handle between
the moulded headliner and the bracket for roof grab handle. Be‐
fore installing, check installation position of spacer and correct if
necessary. Removal of the spacer element is not permissible.
Note

necessary.

– Ensure that both retaining clips are properly engaged in brack‐
et for roof grab handle.
2.10 Removing and installing bracket for roof

grab handle
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left front bracket for
roof grab handle. Follow same instructions for the remaining
brackets for roof grab handle as appropriate.
2. Equipment 41
Removing
– Remove moulded headliner ⇒ page 284 .
– If fitted, unclip cable guide -1- from bracket for roof grab handle
-3-.
– Unscrew bolts -2- and remove bracket for roof grab handle
-3-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.9.1 Assembly overview - roof grab handle”, page 38

3 Centre console
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing front ashtray”, page 43
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing rear centre console trim”,
page 43
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing centre console trim in front foot‐
well”, page 45
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing trim for operating and display unit”,
page 46
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing front centre console storage com‐
partment, Passat 2015► and Passat Estate 2015►”, page 47
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing centre console insert”,
page 47
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing centre console”, page 52
⇒ “3.8 Removing and installing centre console bracket”,
page 57
⇒ “3.8.2 Removing and installing cup holder”, page 58
3.1 Removing and installing front ashtray

Removing
– Remove front ashtray -1- upwards from centre console -2-.
Installing
3.2 Removing and installing rear centre

console trim
If the “rear vent in centre console” installed in the rear centre con‐
sole trim is damaged, it may be renewed separately
⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and installing rear vent in centre console”,
page 44 .
For allocation of “vent” refer to ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue “Plate
819-031”.
3. Centre console 43
♦ Front end hook - 3370-
Removing
– Move front seats to foremost position.
– Push centre armrest forwards.
– Pull rear trim -1- at bottom end to rear off centre console -2-
using front-end hook - 3370- .
– Pull rear trim -1- upwards off centre console -2- -arrow-.
Installing
Note

necessary.
3.2.1 Removing and installing rear vent in

centre console
Removing
– Remove trim at rear of centre console ⇒ page 43 .
– Unscrew bolts at bottom on left and right of rear vent.
– Remove rear vent from rear centre console trim.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
2 bolts 1.5 Nm

3.3 Removing and installing centre console

trim in front footwell
Note
Removal and installation are described for the centre console trim
in the driver footwell of LHD vehicles. For other configurations,
follow same instructions as appropriate.

Removing
– Remove cap -1- from centre console trim in front footwell -3-.
– Unclip centre console trim in front footwell -3- at top and centre
towards seat from mountings.
– Pull centre console trim in front footwell -3- out of remaining
mountings in centre console -4-, and remove it.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
Bolts 1.5 Nm
3.4 Removing and installing trim for operat‐

ing and display unit

♦ Hook - 3438-
Removing
– Remove mounting frame for radio/navigation system
⇒ page 180 .
– Attach hook - 3438- to lower left end of trim -arrow-.
– Using hook - 3438- , carefully unclip trim -1- from assembly
aperture in dash panel.
Installing
Note

necessary.
3.5 Removing and installing front centre

console storage compartment, Passat
2015► and Passat Estate 2015►
Removing
– Remove centre console insert ⇒ page 47 .
– Unclip front storage compartment -1- from centre console in‐
sert -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

insert
♦ Hose clip pliers - V.A.G 1275-
Removing
– On vehicles with dual clutch gearbox, shift selector lever to
position “D”.
The push button -arrow- does not need to be pulled out by hand.
Push button engages automatically in installation position when
handle is pulled off.
– Open storage compartment/ashtray cover.

– Grasp under selector cover with one hand, and unclip it by

pulling it upwards -arrow-.
– Pull gear lever gaiter upwards off gear knob.
– Cut open clamp -arrow- under boot using side cutters.

– Pull handle upwards off selector lever without pressing push
button.
Note
Do not press button again after removal as it will no longer be

possible to install the handle.
– On vehicles with manual gearbox, open storage compartment/

ashtray.
– Press in front-end hook - 3370- to stop under plastic frame for
gaiter -arrow 1- as shown.
– Pull gaiter with plastic frame out of centre console frame -A-
-arrow 2-.
– Pull gear lever gaiter upwards off gear knob.
– Open clamp -arrow- and pull off gear knob together with gear
lever gaiter.
Continuation for all vehicles:
– Unscrew 2 bolts -1- and 2 bolts -2- from centre console insert
-3-.
– Carefully lift up centre console insert -1-, and disconnect con‐

nectors.
Note
As of model year 2019, the lid of the storage compartment has

been discontinued.
– Carefully pull centre console insert -1- out of centre console

-2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

– On vehicles with manual gearbox, push gear knob together
with gear lever gaiter as far as stop onto gear lever.

– Secure gear lever knob to gear lever using clamp -arrow-. Use
hose clip pliers - V.A.G 1275 A- to do this.
Note
For allocation of “clamp”, see ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue
– On vehicles with dual clutch gearbox, shift selector lever to

position “D”.
Note
There is a chance that the button could be pressed into the han‐
dle. Never install a handle with the button pressed in.
If the button was pressed by mistake, the installation position can

be restored.
– Carefully unclip handle trim -A- upwards.
– Using e.g. a screwdriver press small lever -1- for pull rod into
groove -2-. This action presses the push button -3- back into
installation position.
-I- = button pressed in
-II- = button in installation position
Note
♦ Only press the lever into the groove and no further.

♦ Do not clip the handle trim onto selector mechanism until the
handle has been fitted. This makes it possible to check wheth‐
er the small lever engages in the pull rod when the button is
pressed.
Note
If not installed correctly, the button remains inserted in the handle

after being pressed. If this happens, remove handle again, and
bring button back to installation position. Then fit the handle
again.
– Push on handle with new clamp -arrow- to stop. Do not tighten

clamp yet.
Note
For allocation of “clamp”, see ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue
– Press push button after installation.

– If the push button returns to its start position when released,
the clamp can be tightened using the hose clip pliers - V.A.G
1275- .
– Attach electrical connector.
– Clip cover in position.
Torque settings
Bolts 1.5 Nm

⇒ “3.7.1 Removing and installing centre console”, page 52
3.7.1 Removing and installing centre console


Removing
– Remove front ashtray -1- upwards from centre console -2-.
– On vehicles with Climatronic, disconnect connector for tem‐
perature sensor in air duct -1-.
– Pull off air duct -1-.

– Remove left and right centre console trim in front footwell
⇒ page 45 .
– Remove centre console insert ⇒ page 47 .
– Unscrew bolts -1- for retaining bracket -2-.
– On each side, unscrew two bolts -1- for centre console -2-.
– Move both front seats to foremost and highest position.
– Remove caps -1- on left and right from centre console -3-.
– Unscrew bolt -2- for centre console -3- on left and right.
– Unscrew bolts -1- and -2- for centre console -3-.

– Move both front seats to rear.
– On each side, unscrew bolt -1- for centre console -2-.

– Disconnect the electrical connectors depending on vehicle
equipment.

– Lift up rear of centre console -1- and pull it towards rear out of
dash panel.
– Carefully guide centre console -1- over gear lever/selector
lever to remove.
Installing
Note

necessary.
• On vehicles with automatic gearbox or dual clutch gearbox,

shift selector lever to position “D/S”.
• On vehicles with manual gearbox, select 4th gear.
– Insert retaining bracket -1- into corresponding openings in se‐

lector mechanism insulation -2- at front right and front left.
– Swing retaining bracket -1- at rear onto selector mechanism
insulation -2-, and engage it.
– Carefully insert centre console -1-, and engage it in dash pan‐

el.
– Connect electrical connectors depending on vehicle equip‐
ment.
– On each side, secure centre console -2- to dash panel using

bolt -1-.
– At rear end, secure centre console -3- with bolts -1- and -2-.
– Move both front seats to foremost and highest position.
– Secure centre console -3- on left and right with bolt -2-.
– Insert cap -1- into centre console -3- on left and right.
– Move both front seats to rearmost position.
– Secure centre console -2- with 2 bolts -1- on each side.
– Secure retaining bracket -2- with 3 bolts -1-.

Torque settings
2 bolts for securing centre con‐ 1.5 Nm
sole to dash panel
2 bolts at rear 8 Nm
2 bolts at rear on side 8 Nm
4 bolts on side of selector 1.5 Nm
mechanism
3 bolts for retaining bracket in 8 Nm
area of selector mechanism


bracket
⇒ “3.8.1 Centre console bracket, removing and installing mount‐
ing bracket and insulation for selector mechanism”, page 57
⇒ “3.8.2 Removing and installing cup holder”, page 58
3.8.1 Centre console bracket, removing and

installing mounting bracket and insula‐
tion for selector mechanism
Removing
Front bracket
Note
The removal and installation procedure is described for the front

bracket on the driver side. Follow same instructions for the front
passenger side as appropriate.
– Remove centre console trim in footwell on driver side

⇒ page 45 .
– Release cover -1- from front bracket -2- and remove it.
– Remove front retainer -2- upwards from tunnel -3-.
Securing bracket and insulation for selector mechanism
– Remove centre console ⇒ page 52 .
– Unclip retaining bracket -1- at rear from selector mechanism

insulation -2-, and swing it upwards.
– Remove retaining bracket -1- at front from corresponding
openings in selector mechanism insulation -2-.
– Remove air duct vent at rear of centre console ⇒ Heating, air
conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct; Assembly overview - air
duct and air distribution in passenger compartment .
– Unscrew nuts -1-.

– Remove selector mechanism insulation -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
Nuts 8 Nm
3.8.2 Removing and installing cup holder

Removing


– Remove cup holder -2- from centre console.
Torque settings
Bolts 1.5 Nm
4 Front centre armrest

⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing front centre armrest”, page 60
4.1 Removing and installing front centre

armrest
• Front seats in foremost position

Removing
– On vehicles with Climatronic, disconnect connector for tem‐
perature sensor in air duct -1-.
– Remove air duct -1-.
– Unscrew bolts -1- for centre armrest -2-.

– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully push locking tabs be‐
low the two bolts -1- towards outside.
– Pull centre armrest upwards out of centre console.
Installing
Torque settings
Bolts 1.5 Nm

5 On inside
⇒ “5.1 Assembly overview - interior mirror”, page 61
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing interior mirror”, page 65
⇒ “6 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror”, page 74
5.1 Assembly overview - interior mirror

⇒ “5.1.1 Assembly overview - manually operated anti-dazzle in‐
terior mirror”, page 61
terior mirror, with humidity sender G355 ”, page 62
⇒ “5.1.3 Assembly overview - automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror
with rain and light sensor G397 ”, page 62
⇒ “5.1.4 Assembly overview - interior mirror with front camera for
driver assist systems R242 ”, page 64
5.1.1 Assembly overview - manually operated anti-dazzle interior mirror
1 - Retaining plate
❑ For interior mirror.
❑ Glued to windscreen
❑ Can be reattached to
windscreen if detached
❑ Materials for attaching
retaining plate: Alloca‐
tion ⇒ Electronic parts
catalogue
2 - On inside
❑ Manually operated
⇒ page 65
5. On inside 61
5.1.2 Assembly overview - manually operated anti-dazzle interior mirror, with hu‐
midity sender - G355-
1 - Cable guide cover

2 - On inside
parts catalogue
⇒ page 66
3 - Front cover
❑ For mirror base
4 - Spring clip
❑ Always renew spring
clip after removal of in‐
terior mirror
parts catalogue
5 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
6 - Retaining plate
catalogue
5.1.3 Assembly overview - automatic anti-

dazzle interior mirror with rain and light
sensor - G397-
Optionally with main beam assist

1 - Cable guide cover

2 - On inside
parts catalogue
⇒ page 68
3 - Front cover
❑ For mirror base
4 - Spring clip
terior mirror
parts catalogue
5 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
6 - Retaining plate
catalogue
5. On inside 63
5.1.4 Assembly overview - interior mirror with front camera for driver assist sys‐
tems - R242-
1 - Cover for front camera

2 - Cover at front right
❑ For mirror base
3 - Interior mirror with spring
clip
parts catalogue
⇒ page 70
4 - Spring clip
terior mirror
parts catalogue
5 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
6 - Rain and light sensor -
G397-
⇒ Electrical system;
Rep. gr. 92 ; Wind‐
screen wiper system;
Removing and installing
rain and light sensor .
7 - Cover at front left
❑ For mirror base

5.2 Removing and installing interior mirror

⇒ “5.2.1 Removing and installing manually operated anti-dazzle
interior mirror”, page 65
⇒ “5.2.2 Removing and installing manually operated anti-dazzle
interior mirror with humidity sender G355 ”, page 66
⇒ “5.2.3 Removing and installing automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror with rain and light sensor G397 ”, page 68
⇒ “5.2.4 Removing and installing interior mirror with front camera
for driver assist systems R242 ”, page 70
5.2.1 Removing and installing manually operated anti-dazzle interior mirror

Removing
– Turn interior mirror -2- anti-clockwise -arrow- by 90° (1/4 turn).
– Remove interior mirror -2- from glued-on retaining plate -1-.
5. On inside 65
Installing
Note

necessary.
5.2.2 Removing and installing manually oper‐

ated anti-dazzle interior mirror with hu‐
midity sender - G355-
Note
♦ Renew the spring clip each time the interior mirror has been
removed ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue .
♦ Make sure that the components are from the same supplier.
Removing
– Press cable duct cover -1- slightly inwards at sides, in transi‐
tion area to cover -2-, and carefully push in direction of moul‐
ded headliner.
– Remove cable duct cover -1-.
– Slightly bend cover -2- outwards at the sides and pull down‐
wards off mirror.
– Insert screwdriver -1- or drift with a diameter of exactly 4.5 mm

into gap -arrow-.
Caution
When performing the following step, ensure that the screw‐

driver/drift is inserted while turning but do not use as a lever.
– Turn interior mirror -2- at mirror base anti-clockwise by approx.

20° -arrow-.
– Pull off interior mirror -2- downwards.

Installing
Note
5. On inside 67
– Replace spring clip -2- on interior mirror -3- by a new part.

– Fit interior mirror turned by 20° in anti-clockwise direction onto
retaining plate.
Note
Make sure that the mirror is aligned parallel to the retaining plate.
– Turn mirror clockwise until it audibly engages in retaining

plate.
The remaining installation steps are carried out in the reverse se‐
quence of removal.
Installation tips: for example tightening torques, renewing com‐
ponents
terior mirror, with humidity sender G355 ”, page 62
5.2.3 Removing and installing automatic anti-

dazzle interior mirror with rain and light
sensor - G397-
Note
Removing
– Press cable duct cover -1- slightly inwards at sides, in transi‐
tion area to cover -2-, and carefully push in direction of moul‐
ded headliner.
– Remove cable duct cover -1-.
– Slightly bend cover -2- outwards at the sides and pull down‐
wards off mirror.
– Release and disconnect connector -2- on interior mirror.

into gap.

Caution


20° -arrow-.
Installing
Note
5. On inside 69

retaining plate.
Note

plate.
quence of removal.
ponents
⇒ “5.1.3 Assembly overview - automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror
with rain and light sensor G397 ”, page 62
5.2.4 Removing and installing interior mirror

with front camera for driver assist sys‐
tems - R242-
Note

♦ Wedges - T10383-

Removing
– Using wedge - T10383/1- -1-, unclip cover for front camera

-2- from catches in front section of roof console.
– Carefully push cover for front camera -2- slightly downwards
using wedge -1-.
5. On inside 71
– This action will result in a gap between installed mirror base

covers -3- and -4-, -arrows A and B-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , push locking tab -C- of left mir‐
ror base cover -3-.
– Remove right mirror base cover -4- first.
– Then remove left mirror base cover -3-.
– Remove cover for front camera -2-.
– Release and disconnect connector -2- on interior mirror.

into gap.
Caution


20° -arrow-.


Installing
Note

retaining plate.
Note

plate.
quence of removal.
ponents
⇒ “5.1.4 Assembly overview - interior mirror with front camera for
driver assist systems R242 ”, page 64
5. On inside 73
6 Bonding retaining plate for interior

mirror
⇒ “6.1 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror, basic version”,
page 74
⇒ “6.2 Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror, optional equip‐
ment version”, page 75
6.1 Bonding retaining plate for interior mir‐

ror, basic version
Materials
♦ Adhesive sealant; for allocation refer to ⇒ Electronic Parts
Catalogue
♦ Glass scraper (commercially available)
♦ Blade (commercially available)
Bonding
– Detach retaining plate -1- from mirror foot -2- in
-direction of arrow-.
– Remove PUR adhesive sealant from retaining plate -1- using
a wire brush.

– Grind off the three spacer protrusions -arrows- on bonding

surface. To do this, use sandpaper (360/400 grain) laid on flat
surface.
– Keep sanded surface clean and free of grease.
– Remove PUR adhesive sealant as well as old glass/paint pri‐
mer down to ceramic layer on windscreen using a glass scra‐
per.
Caution
Do not damage ceramic coating. Scratches will remain per‐

manently visible.
– Clean bonding area with adhesive remover or cleaning solu‐

tion; for allocation refer to ⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue .
– Cut nylon mesh fabric -3- exactly to size of retaining plate

-2-.
Note
Wear protective (rubber) gloves.
– Apply a good layer of adhesive -1- evenly to retaining plate

-2-.
– Place nylon mesh fabric -3- on retaining plate -2-.
– Dab nylon mesh fabric -3- with tube of adhesive -1- while ap‐
plying further adhesive.
Note
♦ It is essential to bear in mind the drying time of the adhesive.

♦ Only 30 seconds are available from laying nylon mesh fabric
on adhesive to pressing plate onto windscreen.
– Press retaining plate -1- (do not use force) against windscreen
-2- for 15 seconds.
Note
Interior mirror can be installed after 15 minutes.
6.2 Bonding retaining plate for interior mir‐

ror, optional equipment version
Materials
♦ Adhesive sealant; for allocation refer to ⇒ Electronic Parts
Catalogue
6. Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror 75

♦ Glass scraper (commercially available)

♦ Blade (commercially available)
Note
♦ With the repair procedure described, it is no longer necessary

to renew the windscreen.
♦ At the same time, it is also possible to reuse the old mirror base
which has fallen off.
Preparing windscreen
– All adhesive and primer residue must be removed from the
ceramic pre-coating -1-.
– Clean bonding area with adhesive remover or cleaning solu‐
tion; for allocation refer to ⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue .
– Adhere to “flash-off period” of at least 10 minutes.
– Apply glass/paint primer to ceramic pre-coating -1-.
– Flash-off period until bonding: minimum of 10 minutes to max‐
imum of 1 hour.
Preparation of detached retaining plate

– Mechanically remove adhesive residue:
♦ Prepare bonding surface -1- with “wet-on-wet” method by
sanding down with wet fine emery paper (800-1200 grade)
until surface to be bonded is completely moist.
♦ Then clean with cleaning solution.
♦ Adhere to “flash-off period” of at least 10 minutes.

Gluing retaining plate on

– Apply adhesive directly onto sanded and cleaned bonding
surface -1- of retaining plate.
– Adhesive bead diameter: approx. 2.5…3.0 mm
– Immediately after applying adhesive, press retaining plate

-1- into position on prepared windscreen -2-.
– Centre retaining plate -1- in its intended position on ceramic
pre-coated surface and secure with adhesive tape.
Cleaning and removing excessive adhesive

– Carefully remove adhesive tape 0.5 … 1 hour after gluing on
retaining plate.
– Remove excessive and still soft adhesive -1- using a spatula.
– Then remove remaining excess adhesive completely using a
cloth or primer applicator soaked in cleaning solution.
Note
The interior mirror can be fitted 2.5 hours after retaining plate has
been glued on.
6. Bonding retaining plate for interior mirror 77

69 – Passenger protection
1 Seat belts
⇒ “1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage
points”, page 78
⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - front three-point seat belt”,
page 82
⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt”, page
83
⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - rear centre three-point seat belt”,
page 85
⇒ “1.5 Assembly overview - front belt buckle”, page 86
⇒ “1.6 Assembly overview - rear belt buckle”, page 87
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing front three-point seat belt”,
page 88
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing rear three-point seat belt”,
page 90
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing front belt guide”, page 95
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing rear belt guide”, page 95
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing front belt end fitting”, page 96
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing rear outer belt end fitting”, page
97
⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing belt height adjuster”, page 97
⇒ “1.14 Removing and installing front belt buckle”, page 99
⇒ “1.15 Removing and installing rear belt buckle”, page 100
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts

and anchorage points
⇒ “1.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage
points, Saloon”, page 78
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage
points, Estate”, page 80
1.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage points, Saloon
78 Rep. gr.69 - Passenger protection

1 - Rear outer belt end anchor

⇒ page 83 .
⇒ page 97
2 - Belt inertia reel
❑ For rear outer three-
point seat belt.
⇒ page 83 .
⇒ page 90
❑ For rear centre three-
point seat belt.
⇒ page 85 .
⇒ page 94
4 - Rear centre belt end fitting
⇒ page 85 .
⇒ page 100
❑ For rear outer three-
point seat belt.
⇒ page 83 .
⇒ page 90
6 - Belt height adjustment
❑ Assembly overview ⇒ page 82 .
8 - Front three-point seat belt
❑ With driver seat belt tensioner igniter 1 - N153- and control unit for front left belt tensioner - J854- .
9 - Front belt end anchor
10 - Rear belt buckle
11 - Front belt buckles
1. Seat belts 79

❑ With front passenger seat belt tensioner igniter 1 - N154- and control unit for front right belt tensioner -
J855- .
1.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - seat belts and anchorage points, Estate
1 - Front belt buckles

⇒ page 86 .
⇒ page 99
⇒ page 82 .
⇒ page 96
❑ With front passenger
seat belt tensioner ignit‐
er 1 - N154- and control
unit for front right belt
tensioner - J855- .
⇒ page 82 .
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 82 .
⇒ page 97
⇒ page 84 .
⇒ page 97
⇒ page 85 .
❑ For rear outer three-point seat belt.


❑ For rear centre three-point seat belt.
❑ For rear outer three-point seat belt.
❑ With driver seat belt tensioner igniter 1 - N153- and control unit for front left belt tensioner - J854- .
14 - Rear belt buckle
1. Seat belts 81
1.2 Assembly overview - front three-point seat belt
1 - Bolt
❑ If removed due to an ac‐
cident with seat belt fas‐
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
2 - Belt end fitting
⇒ page 96
3 - Spreader rivet
4 - Front belt guide
⇒ page 95
❑ Observe correct instal‐
lation position when in‐
stalling.
5 - Bolt
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
6 - Bolt
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Belt anchor
❑ Must move to vertical
position or operated po‐
sition on its own after
bolt has been tightened.
⇒ page 97
❑ Always renew after belt tensioner has deployed with seat belt fastened.
❑ Driver side: with driver seat belt tensioner igniter 1 - N153- and control unit for front left belt tensioner -
J854- .
❑ Front passenger side: with front passenger seat belt tensioner igniter 1 - N154- and control unit for front
right belt tensioner - J855- .
❑ On vehicles with control unit for front left belt tensioner - J854- or control unit for front right belt tensioner
- J855- , components must be adapted to airbag control unit - J234- after safety belt has been renewed
⇒ Guided Fault Finding . If ⇒ Guided Fault Finding has already been started, refresh test plan “15 -
Airbag”.
10 - Bolt
❑ If removed due to an accident with seat belt fastened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm

1.3 Assembly overview - rear outer three-

point seat belt
⇒ “1.3.1 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt, Sa‐
loon”, page 83
⇒ “1.3.2 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt, Es‐
tate”, page 84
1.3.1 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt, Saloon
1 - Belt guide
⇒ page 95
⇒ page 90
3 - Bolt
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
4 - Bolt
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Wiring harness
❑ Only in conjunction with
belt tensioner
6 - Bolt
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
⇒ page 97
1. Seat belts 83
1.3.2 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt, Estate
1 - Belt guide
⇒ page 96
⇒ page 90
3 - Wiring harness
❑ Only in conjunction with
belt tensioner
4 - Bolt
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
5 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
6 - Bolt for rear outer belt end
anchor
tened, renew bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
⇒ page 97

1.4 Assembly overview - rear centre three-point seat belt
1 - Belt buckle
❑ With rear belt switch,
front passenger side -
E259- .
⇒ page 100
❑ Always renew after belt
tensioner has deployed
with seat belt fastened.
❑ Must rest flat against
contact surface when
tightening nut.
2 - Nut
❑ Specified torque: 40 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ Removed due to an ac‐
tened, renew nut.
❑ Specified torque: 40 Nm
⇒ page 94
5 - Rear centre belt guide
❑ Renew complete belt
guide if damaged.
❑ To remove, push lock‐
ing lugs inwards on both
sides and pull out belt
guide.
❑ When installing, push in
belt guide until it audibly
engages.
6 - Right rear seat backrest
(2/3)
1. Seat belts 85
1.5 Assembly overview - front belt buckle
1 - Front belt buckle

⇒ page 99
2 - Front seat
❑ Driver side: with driver
side belt switch - E24- .
❑ Front passenger side:
with front passenger
side belt switch - E25- .
⇒ page 327
3 - Bolt
❑ Renew each time it is
loosened
❑ 40 Nm

1.6 Assembly overview - rear belt buckle
1 - Left double belt buckle

driver side - E258- .
⇒ page 100
❑ Press on belt buckle
when bolting it on.
contact surface.
2 - Centre belt buckle
❑ With rear centre belt
switch - E609- .
⇒ page 100
❑ Press on belt buckle
when bolting it on.
contact surface.
3 - Right belt buckle with rear
centre belt end fitting
E259- .
⇒ page 100
❑ Must rest flat against contact surface when tightening nut.
4 - Nut
❑ Removed due to an accident with seat belt fastened, renew nut.
❑ 40 Nm
5 - Electrical connector
❑ For rear belt switch, front passenger side - E259- .
6 - Nut
❑ Removed due to an accident with seat belt fastened, renew nut.
❑ 40 Nm
❑ For rear belt switch, driver side - E258- and rear centre belt switch - E609- .
1. Seat belts 87
1.7 Removing and installing front three-

point seat belt
Removing
WARNING
♦ Observe safety instructions for pyrotechnic components

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe disposal regulations for pyrotechnic components
⇒ page 4 .
– Disconnect battery earth cable with ignition switched on ⇒

Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery; Connecting and dis‐
connecting battery .
Caution
On vehicles with high-voltage battery, a voltage test of the 12-

V electrical system must be performed after the 12-V battery
is disconnected. If voltage is detected, the high-voltage system
must be de-energised.
– Remove lower B-pillar trim ⇒ page 233 .

– Remove front belt end fitting ⇒ page 96 .
– Remove front belt guide ⇒ page 95 .
– Remove belt guide fitting -2- with belt webbing.
WARNING
Before handling pyrotechnic components (e.g. separating the

electrical connector), the person handling them must ensure
that he/she is “electrically discharged”. To do this briefly touch,
for example, the door striker plate.
Vehicles without reversible belt tensioner

– Release connector locking device -arrow- using a small screw‐
driver and pull off connector for seat belt tensioner igniter 1
-item 1-.
– Unscrew bolt -3- and remove belt inertia reel -2- from mount‐
ing.

Vehicles with reversible belt tensioner

– Release and pull off connectors -2- and -5-.
– Remove spreader rivet -1-.
– Unscrew bolt -4- and remove belt inertia reel -3- from mount‐
ing.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Before handling pyrotechnic components (e.g. connecting
the electrical connector), the person handling them must
ensure that he/she is “electrically discharged”. To do this
briefly touch, for example, the door striker plate.

Note
Ensure that the electrical connectors are pushed fully onto stop
and engage audibly.
– Fit belt inertia reel ensuring that anti-rotation tab -1- engages
in mounting -2- -arrow- and tighten bolt.
1. Seat belts 89
– Connect connector -1- to igniter -arrow A-.

– Press in connector lock -2- -arrow B-. Doing so, the connector
will be fully inserted into igniter and locked at the same time.
WARNING
Battery must be connected with ignition switched on. If pyro‐

technic components (e.g. airbag, seat belt tensioners) are
repaired incorrectly, they may be accidentally triggered after
the battery is connected. Ensure that nobody is in vehicle when
connecting battery.
– Connect battery earth cable with ignition switched on ⇒ Elec‐

trical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery; Connecting and discon‐
necting battery .
WARNING
If the ignition has not yet been switched on after the battery has
been reconnected “warning lamps in dash panel insert are off”,
the ignition (key or button) must only be switched on while sit‐
ting on the driver seat and with the seat set to rearmost
position.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - front three-point seat belt”,
page 82
On vehicles with control unit for front left belt tensioner - J854- or
control unit for front right belt tensioner - J855- , components must
be adapted to airbag control unit - J234- after safety belt has been
renewed ⇒ Guided Fault Finding . If ⇒ Guided Fault Finding has
already been started, refresh test plan “15 - Airbag”.
1.8 Removing and installing rear three-point

seat belt
⇒ “1.8.1 Removing and installing rear outer three-point seat belt,
Saloon, without belt tensioner”, page 90
⇒ “1.8.2 Removing and installing outer rear three-point seat belt,
Saloon, with belt tensioner”, page 91
Estate, without belt tensioner”, page 92
Estate, with belt tensioner”, page 93
⇒ “1.8.5 Removing and installing rear centre three-point seat
belt”, page 94
1.8.1 Removing and installing rear outer

three-point seat belt, Saloon, without
belt tensioner
Removing
– Remove rear shelf ⇒ page 247 .
– Remove outer rear seat belt guide anchor ⇒ page 97 .

– Remove seat belt -3- from belt guide -4-.

– Remove belt inertia reel -2- from mounting.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.3.1 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt,
Saloon”, page 83
1.8.2 Removing and installing outer rear

three-point seat belt, Saloon, with belt
tensioner
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .

Caution


WARNING
Electrostatic discharges may result in unintentional triggering

of airbag. Therefore, the mechanics must electrostatically dis‐
charge themselves before disconnecting the igniter and earth
wires. This can be done by briefly touching the body or striker
plate of the door.
1. Seat belts 91
– Disconnect wiring harness, and unclip connector -4-.

– Remove belt -3- from belt guide -5-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .

Note
and engage audibly.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Torque settings
Saloon”, page 83

three-point seat belt, Estate, without belt
tensioner
Removing
– Remove bench seat ⇒ page 378 .

– Remove D-pillar trim ⇒ page 241 .

– Pull out seat belt -3- from under belt guide -4-.
Installing
Torque settings
Estate”, page 84

three-point seat belt, Estate, with belt
tensioner
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .

Caution


WARNING
Electrostatic discharges may result in unintentional triggering

of airbag. Therefore, the mechanics must electrostatically dis‐
charge themselves before disconnecting the igniter and earth
wires. This can be done by briefly touching the body or striker
plate of the door.
1. Seat belts 93
– Disconnect wiring harness, and unclip connector -1-.

– Pull out seat belt -4- from under belt guide -5-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .

Note
and engage audibly.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Torque settings
Estate”, page 84
1.8.5 Removing and installing rear centre

three-point seat belt
Removing
– Remove backrest cover with backrest cushion from rear seat
backrest ⇒ page 425 .

– Remove nuts -1-.

– Detach three-point seat belt -2- and remove it.
– Guide out belt webbing -3-.
Installing
– If parts of the belt system are removed due to an accident, belt
system securing nuts must be renewed.
– Fit three-point seat belt ensuring that anti-rotation tab engages
in mounting and tighten nut.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - rear centre three-point seat belt”,
page 85
1.9 Removing and installing front belt guide

Removing
– Remove upper B-pillar trim ⇒ page 233 .
– Press together clip on belt guide -1- -arrows a-.
– At the same time detach belt guide -1- downwards from body
-arrow b-.
– With clip pressed together, pull out belt guide -1- upwards
-arrow c-.
– Thread out belt webbing, and remove belt guide -1-.
Installing
Note
Observe correct installation position of the belt guide when in‐

stalling.
1.10 Removing and installing rear belt guide

⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing rear belt guide, Saloon”, page
95
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing rear belt guide, Estate”,
page 96
1.10.1 Removing and installing rear belt guide,

Saloon
Removing
1. Seat belts 95
– Unscrew bolt -1-, and remove belt guide -2-.

Installing
Note

stalling.
Torque settings
Saloon”, page 83
1.10.2 Removing and installing rear belt guide,

Estate
Removing
– Unscrew bolts -1-, and remove belt guide -2-.
Installing
Note

stalling.
Torque settings
Estate”, page 84
1.11 Removing and installing front belt end

fitting
Removing
• Front seat must be positioned in foremost and highest posi‐
tion.
– Fold service cover in sill panel moulding in area of belt end
fitting inwards.
– Unscrew bolt -1- and release belt end fitting -2- from body.
Installing
Torque settings
page 82

1.12 Removing and installing rear outer belt

end fitting
Removing
– Removing wheel housing trim ⇒ page 242 .
– Unscrew bolt -1-, and release belt end fitting -2- from body.
Installing
• The anti-rotation tab -arrow- on the floor panel must be seated

in the respective recess on belt end fitting -2-.
– Tighten bolt -1- on belt end fitting -2-.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - rear outer three-point seat belt”,
page 83
1.13 Removing and installing belt height ad‐

juster
Removing
– Press belt height adjuster button and move slider of belt height
adjuster to lowest position.
– Detach upper B-pillar trim ⇒ page 233 .
– Place B-pillar trim with belt webbing attached to one side.
1. Seat belts 97

– Remove belt guide fitting -1- with belt webbing.
– Pull belt height adjuster -2- upwards off B-pillar.
Installing
Note
♦ As a replacement part, belt height adjusters always come with

slider for belt height adjuster set to lowest position (assembly
position).
♦ If previously removed belt height adjusters are reinstalled,
they must be moved to lowest position for installation (assem‐
bly position).
– Attach belt height adjuster -2- on B-pillar.

– Tighten bolt -3-.
– Install belt guide fitting -1-, and tighten bolt -4-.
Note
The belt height adjuster button must not be pressed when instal‐
ling the B-pillar trim.
– Initially, fit B-pillar trim -3- upwards into mounting in roof.

• Mounting -2- of sliding part on B-pillar trim must engage in re‐
taining pin -1- on belt height adjuster -arrow-.
– If a new belt height adjuster is installed, firmly push sliding part
upwards after B-pillar trim has been installed.
• This will release the installation guard of the belt height ad‐
juster.
– Check the following functions:
• Belt height adjuster must engage audibly in each of the 3 pos‐
sible positions (including top position).
• Belt height adjuster button must return to top position after any
operation.
• Belt guide fitting must move to vertical position or operated
position on its own.
If one of the requirements is not fulfilled, check belt height adjuster
for correct installation and renew it if necessary.
Torque settings
page 82

1.14 Removing and installing front belt buckle

Removing
– Remove front seat ⇒ page 327 .
– Disconnect electrical connector of belt buckle from coupling

station on underside of seat pan.
– Detach electrical wire from seat pan.
– Unscrew bolt -3- and remove belt buckle -1- from seat -2-.
Installing
1. Seat belts 99
– Fit belt buckle -2- in such a way that the recess -arrow B- co‐
incides with the lug -arrow A- on seat pan -1-.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.5 Assembly overview - front belt buckle”, page 86
1.15 Removing and installing rear belt buckle

Removing
– Remove bench seat / single seats ⇒ page 378 .
Right side: belt buckle with belt end fitting
Note
The belt buckle with belt end fitting is part of the rear centre seat
belt.
– Separate electrical connector -2- for belt switch.

– Remove belt buckle -3- from belt end fitting.
Left side: double belt buckle

– Separate electrical connector -3- for belt switch.
– Remove double belt buckle -1-.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.6 Assembly overview - rear belt buckle”, page 87

2 Child seat anchors

⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - rear child seat anchors”, page 101
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing guide for ISOFIX child seat an‐
chor”, page 102
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing cover for Top Tether child seat
anchor”, page 102
2.1 Assembly overview - rear child seat anchors
1 - ISOFIX child seat anchor

❑ Qty. 4
❑ Welded to underbody.
2 - Guide
❑ For ISOFIX child seat
anchor
❑ Qty. 4
⇒ page 102
❑ Must be seated firmly on
child seat anchor.
3 - Cover
anchor
❑ Qty. 4
⇒ page 102
❑ Must be seated firmly on
child seat anchor.
4 - Top Tether child seat an‐
chor
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Welded to backrest
frame.
5 - Cover
❑ For Top Tether child
seat anchor.
❑ Qty. 2
⇒ page 102
❑ Attach to child seat an‐
chor and push it in until
it audibly engages.
❑ Can only be fitted on rear seat backrest in a specific position.
6 - Rear seat backrest
2. Child seat anchors 101

2.2 Removing and installing guide for ISO‐

FIX child seat anchor
Removing
– Unclip cover -1- from ISOFIX child seat anchor -arrow- and
remove it.
– Push guide -1- downwards out of recess and detach it from

ISOFIX child seat anchor -2-.
– Remove guide -arrow- towards front.
Installing
2.3 Removing and installing cover for Top

Tether child seat anchor
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Fold down rear seat backrest.
– Release locking lugs using wedge -T10383/1- -arrows-.
– Lever cover -2- for Top Tether child seat anchor upwards off
rear seat backrest.
– Carefully pull cover off Top Tether child seat anchor -1- and
remove it.
Installing

3 Airbag system
⇒ “3.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system”, page 103
3.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag sys‐

tem
⇒ “3.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system, Saloon”,
page 103
⇒ “3.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system, Estate”,
page 105
3.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system, Saloon
1 - Airbag control unit - J234-

⇒ page 107 .
2 - Airbag warning lamp - K75-
❑ Integrated into dash
panel insert
❑ Cannot be replaced in‐
dividually
dash panel insert ⇒
gr. 90 ; Dash panel in‐
sert; Assembly over‐
view - dash panel insert .
3 - Front passenger side airbag
deactivated warning lamp -
K145-
dividually
Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls;
Overview of fitting loca‐
tions - controls in dash
panel
tions in roof console,
Passat 2019 ►
4 - Key operated switch to de‐
activate front passenger side
airbag - E224-
⇒ page 125
side airbag igniter 1 - N131- .
❑ Can be locked and activated via key operated switch to deactivate front passenger side airbag - E224- .
6 - Front side airbag, front passenger side
❑ With side airbag igniter on front passenger side - N200- .
3. Airbag system 103

7 - Head airbag, front passenger side

❑ With front passenger side curtain airbag igniter - N252- .
8 - Rear side airbag, front passenger side
❑ With rear side airbag igniter on front passenger side - N202- .
9 - Head airbag, driver side
❑ With driver side curtain airbag igniter - N251- .
10 - Rear side airbag, driver side
❑ With rear side airbag igniter on driver side - N201- .
11 - Front side airbag, driver side
❑ With side airbag igniter on driver side - N199- .
12 - Driver's airbag
❑ With driver side airbag igniter - N95- .
13 - Steering column electronics control unit - J527-
❑ With airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
❑ Assembly overview ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 94 ; Steering column switch module; Assembly over‐
view - steering column switch module
14 - Bracket for knee airbag on driver side
❑ Assembly overview ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering column, Assembly overview
- steering column
15 - Knee airbag, driver side
❑ With driver side knee airbag igniter - N295- .

3.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - airbag system, Estate

⇒ page 107 .
2 - Airbag warning lamp - K75-
❑ Integrated into dash
panel insert
dividually
dash panel insert ⇒
gr. 90 ; Dash panel in‐
sert; Assembly over‐
view - dash panel insert .
deactivated warning lamp -
K145-
dividually
Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls;
Overview of fitting loca‐
tions - controls in dash
panel
tions in roof console,
Passat Estate 2019 ►
4 - Key operated switch to de‐
activate front passenger side
airbag - E224-
⇒ page 125
side airbag igniter 1 - N131- .
❑ Can be locked and activated via key operated switch to deactivate front passenger side airbag - E224- .
6 - Front side airbag, front passenger side
❑ With side airbag igniter on front passenger side - N200- .
7 - Head airbag, front passenger side
❑ With front passenger side curtain airbag igniter - N252- .
8 - Rear side airbag, front passenger side
❑ With rear side airbag igniter on front passenger side - N202- .
9 - Head airbag, driver side
❑ With driver side curtain airbag igniter - N251- .
10 - Rear side airbag, driver side
❑ With rear side airbag igniter on driver side - N201- .
3. Airbag system 105

11 - Front side airbag, driver side
❑ With side airbag igniter on driver side - N199- .
12 - Driver's airbag
13 - Steering column electronics control unit - J527-
❑ With airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
❑ Assembly overview ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 94 ; Steering column switch module; Assembly over‐
view - steering column switch module
14 - Bracket for knee airbag on driver side
❑ Assembly overview ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering column, Assembly overview
- steering column
15 - Knee airbag, driver side
❑ With driver side knee airbag igniter - N295- .

4 Airbag control unit

⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - airbag control unit”, page 107
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing airbag control unit J234 ”,
page 107
4.1 Assembly overview - airbag control unit

⇒ page 107
❑ The control unit is earth‐
ed via the housing with
the body.
2 - Nut
❑ Nut and earth stud form
the earth connection for
the control unit.
❑ Threads must be free of
paint and dirt.
❑ 9 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Nut and earth stud form
the earth connection for
the control unit.
❑ Threads must be free of
paint and dirt.
❑ 9 Nm
4.2 Removing and installing airbag control

unit - J234-
Removing
WARNING
Observe safety instructions for pyrotechnic components

⇒ page 3 .

4. Airbag control unit 107

Caution

– Remove centre console trim in footwell ⇒ page 45 .

– Remove front centre console bracket on driver and front pas‐
senger sides ⇒ page 57 .

– Unscrew nut -3- in driver footwell.
WARNING

– Disconnect connector in front passenger footwell. To do this,

release connector catches and open locking bar -5- on con‐
nector -arrow-.
– Unscrew nuts -1, 4-.
– Lift airbag control unit -2- clear of studs and remove towards
front passenger side.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the heater and air conditioning unit are not
shown in illustration.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
Note
and engage audibly.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
4. Airbag control unit 109

WARNING
position.
Note
♦ If airbag warning lamp - K75- indicates a fault following instal‐

lation, event memory must be read, deleted and then read
again ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
♦ If a new airbag control unit -J234- is installed, the control unit
must be encoded ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - airbag control unit”, page 107

5 Battery isolator igniter

⇒ “5.1 Assembly overview - battery isolator igniter”, page 111
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing battery isolator igniter”,
page 111
5.1 Assembly overview - battery isolator igniter
❑ For battery isolation ig‐
niter - N253-
❑ Release and pull off
⇒ page 113
2 - Nuts
❑ 15 Nm
3 - Battery isolator igniter -
N253-
⇒ page 111
4 - Fuse holder A - SA-
5 - Cover
❑ For fuse holder A - SA-
6 - Battery positive terminal
clamp
❑ Specified torque ⇒
gr. 27 ; Battery; Assem‐
bly overview - battery
5.2 Removing and installing battery isolator

igniter
♦ Vehicle diagnostic tester
5. Battery isolator igniter 111

Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .
Note
♦ If the airbag warning lamp - K75- lights up following an acci‐

dent, use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester to check if crash data has
been stored. If yes, check whether the »Resistance too high«
fault has been logged in the event memory for the battery iso‐
lation igniter - N253- . If yes, the battery isolation igniter - N253-
must be renewed.
♦ The battery isolation igniter - N253- interrupts the electrical
circuit every time the airbag is triggered. The battery isolation
igniter - N253- must be renewed every time the airbag is trig‐
gered.
♦ As a replacement part, the battery isolation igniter - N253- is
only available as a unit with fuse holder A - SA- .
♦ To renew the battery isolation igniter -N253- individually, un‐
bolt it from the new replacement part and install it on the
existing fuse holder A - SA- as described below.
– With ignition switched on, disconnect battery earth cable ⇒

Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery; Disconnecting and connecting battery .
Caution

– Loosen nut -1- several turns and pull battery terminal clamp of
positive cable off battery terminal together with fuse holder A
- SA- .
– Pull out fuse holder A - SA- upwards.
– Release retaining spring -3-, and swing cover -2- above fuse
holder A - SA- upwards to open it -arrow-.

WARNING

– Unscrew nuts -2- and -3-.

– Remove battery isolation igniter -4-.
– To do this, release connector lock -5- using a small screw‐
driver and pull off connector -1-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
Note
Ensure electrical connector is pushed fully onto stop and engages

audibly.
WARNING

connecting battery.
– With ignition switched on, connect battery earth cable ⇒ Rep.

gr. 27 ; Battery; Disconnecting and connecting battery .
WARNING
position.
– Finally, read and clear event memory of airbag control unit

since faults may be stored as a result of disconnecting elec‐
trical connectors ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
5. Battery isolator igniter 113

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.1 Assembly overview - battery isolator igniter”,
page 111

6 Driver's airbag
⇒ “6.1 Assembly overview - driver side airbag”, page 115
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing airbag unit with igniter”,
page 116
⇒ “6.3 Renewing connector on airbag”, page 120
6.1 Assembly overview - driver side airbag
1 - Catch
❑ To release, use a screw‐
driver or similar tool
❑ Maximum overall length
of tool 100 mm
2 - Steering column electronics
control unit - J527-
❑ With airbag coil connec‐
tor and return ring with
slip ring - F138-
gr. 94 ; Steering column
switch module; Assem‐
column switch module
3 - Steering wheel without mul‐
tifunction button
❑ Equipment version
Running gear, axles,
steering; Rep. gr. 48 ;
Steering wheel, Assem‐
wheel .
4 - Wiring harness without
wires for multifunction button
❑ For driver side airbag ig‐
niter - N95-
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 120
❑ Press into recesses in
steering wheel to secure
it.
5 - Driver's airbag
❑ With driver side airbag
igniter - N95- .
WARNING
Observe safety instruc‐
tions for pyrotechnic
components ⇒ page 3 .

6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening torque ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering wheel; Assembly overview -
steering wheel
6. Driver's airbag 115

7 - Steering wheel with multifunction button

❑ Assembly overview ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering wheel, Assembly overview
- steering wheel .
8 - Wiring harness with wires for multifunction button
❑ For driver side airbag igniter - N95-
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 120
❑ Press into recesses in steering wheel to secure it.
9 - Driver's airbag
WARNING

10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening torque ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering wheel; Assembly overview -
steering wheel
6.2 Removing and installing airbag unit with

igniter
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .
– Move steering wheel to rearmost and lowest position.

– Use the full adjustment range of the steering column adjust‐
ment for this purpose.
– Turn steering wheel so that the opening on backside of steer‐
ing wheel is exactly in top position.
– Release locking bar -1- for driver side airbag -2- -arrows-.

– To do this, use a screwdriver or similar tool with a maximum

length of 100 mm.
Note
If a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, wires may become damaged.
– Turn steering wheel through 180° and repeat procedure on

opposite side of steering wheel.
– Return steering wheel to mid-position (wheels pointing straight
ahead).
Caution

WARNING


– Carefully pull driver side airbag -3- slightly out of steering

wheel.
– Pull out connector lock -2- -arrow- and press it down, then pull
off connector -1-.
– On vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, disconnect con‐
nector.
WARNING
Place airbag to one side such that the impact padding points
upwards.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
Note
♦ Ensure that the electrical connectors are pushed fully onto

stop and engage audibly.
♦ Ensure that no wires are trapped.
– Connect connector.
– Press connector into recesses in steering wheel to secure it.

– Position driver side airbag -1- in steering wheel and, holding

airbag at edge with both hands, push it in until it audibly en‐
gages.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .

WARNING
position.
– Finally, read and clear event memory of airbag control unit

since faults may be stored as a result of disconnecting elec‐
trical connectors ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.1 Assembly overview - driver side airbag”, page 115
6.3 Renewing connector on airbag

Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
– Remove driver side airbag ⇒ page 116 .

Vehicles with steering wheel without multifunction button
WARNING

– Release connector lock -2- using a small screwdriver -arrow-

and pull connector -1- off driver side airbag igniter - N95- .

– Disconnect connectors from wiring harness -1-.

– Detach wiring harness from retainers and remove it from driver
side airbag -2-.
Vehicles with steering wheel with multifunction button
WARNING

– Release connector lock -2- using a small screwdriver -arrow-

and pull connector -1- off driver side airbag igniter - N95- .
– Disconnect connectors from wiring harness -1-.

– Detach wiring harness from retainers and remove it from driver
side airbag -2-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
– Connect connector -1- to airbag igniter -arrow A-.

will be fully inserted into airbag igniter and locked at the same
time.
Continue installation in reverse order of removal. Observe the
following when doing this.
Note
and engage audibly.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.1 Assembly overview - driver side airbag”, page 115

7 Front passenger side airbag

⇒ “7.1 Assembly overview - front passenger side airbag”,
page 122
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag unit
with igniter”, page 123
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing key-operated switch to deactivate
front passenger side airbag”, page 125
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag de‐
activated warning lamp K145 ”, page 126
7.1 Assembly overview - front passenger side airbag
❑ For front passenger side
airbag igniter 1 - N131-
2 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Clean before renewing
and reinstalling and in‐
sert with locking fluid ,
allocation ⇒ Electronic
parts catalogue
❑ 8 Nm
3 - Dash panel
❑ Renew dash panel after
airbag has deployed
⇒ page 183 .
4 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Clean before renewing
and reinstalling and in‐
sert with locking fluid ,
allocation ⇒ Electronic
parts catalogue
❑ 8 Nm
side airbag igniter 1 -
N131- .
WARNING
Observe
♦ safety instruc‐
Note
♦ allocation of airbag
unit to dash panel ⇒
Electronic parts cata‐
logue .
❑ Can be locked and activated via key-operated switch


7.2 Removing and installing front passenger

side airbag unit with igniter
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .
♦ Note allocation of airbag unit to dash panel ⇒ Electronic
parts catalogue .

Caution

WARNING

– Disconnect connector -4- on front passenger side airbag ig‐

niter 1 - N131- .
7. Front passenger side airbag 123

– To do this release connector lock -2- using a small screwdriver

-arrow- and pull off connector -1-.
– Unscrew bolts -2- and -3-

– Remove front passenger side airbag -1- downwards.
WARNING
Place airbag aside in such a way that the impact padding points
upwards.
Installing
Note
Before the bolts are installed, the threads of the bolts and nuts in
the dash panel must be cleaned.
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Note allocation of airbags to dash panel ⇒ Electronic parts
catalogue .


time.
Note

WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note
If airbag warning lamp - K75- indicates a fault following installa‐

tion, event memory must be read, deleted and then read again
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “7.1 Assembly overview - front passenger side airbag”, page
122
♦ ⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - dash panel”, page 175
7.3 Removing and installing key-operated

switch to deactivate front passenger
side airbag
Removing
7. Front passenger side airbag 125

– Remove side dash panel cover ⇒ page 177 .

– Press locking detent -1- in -direction of arrow- until connector
disengages.
– Pull off electrical connector -2-.
– Release retaining springs -3- and -5-.
– Push key operated switch to deactivate front passenger side
airbag - E224- -item 4- out of housing for key operated switch.
Installing
Note

– Ensure that key operated switch to deactivate front passenger

side airbag - E224- audibly engages in housing.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment”, page 18
7.4 Removing and installing front passenger

side airbag deactivated warning lamp -
K145-
Note
The front passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp -

K145- is integrated into the centre switch module in dash panel -
EX22- and cannot be renewed individually when defective.
– Removing and installing centre switch module in dash panel -

EX22- ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls; Overview
of fitting locations - controls in dash panel .

8 Side airbags
⇒ “8.1 Assembly overview - front side airbag”, page 127
⇒ “8.2 Assembly overview - rear side airbag”, page 128
⇒ “8.3 Removing and installing front side airbag with igniter”, page
128
⇒ “8.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag with igniter”, page
129
8.1 Assembly overview - front side airbag
1 - Backrest frame
2 - Hook
❑ For attaching side air‐
bag to backrest frame
3 - Front side airbag
❑ Driver side: with side air‐
bag igniter on driver side
- N199- .
with side airbag igniter
on front passenger side
- N200- .
WARNING

⇒ page 128
4 - Bolt
❑ Renew after removal
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Wire
❑ From side airbag igniter
on driver side - N199- /
side airbag igniter on
N200- .
8. Side airbags 127

8.2 Assembly overview - rear side airbag
1 - Seat bolster
2 - Washer
❑ Qty. 2
3 - Nut
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 6 Nm
4 - Rear side airbag
❑ Driver side: with rear
side airbag igniter on
driver side - N201- .
with rear side airbag ig‐
niter on front passenger
side - N202- .
⇒ page 129
5 - Wire
❑ From rear side airbag ig‐
niter on driver side -
N201- / rear side airbag
igniter on front passen‐
ger side - N202- .
WARNING
6 - Airbag pocket
8.3 Removing and installing front side air‐

bag with igniter
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe the additional safety regulations for the side air‐
bag ⇒ page 5 .
⇒ page 4 .

– Remove front backrest ⇒ page 343 .
– Remove backrest cover and backrest padding ⇒ page 406 .


– Push side airbag -1- upwards and remove it from backrest
frame.
– Carefully detach cable retainer for side airbag wiring harness
-3- from backrest.
Installing
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “8.1 Assembly overview - front side airbag”, page 127
8.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag

with igniter
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe the additional safety regulations for the side air‐
bag ⇒ page 5 .
⇒ page 4 .
– Remove side padding ⇒ page 391 .
8. Side airbags 129


– Detach clip -1- from seat bolster.
– Remove side airbag -3- from airbag pocket, and disconnect
connector.
Installing
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
Caution

WARNING
position.
Note

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “8.2 Assembly overview - rear side airbag”, page 128

9 Curtain airbags
⇒ “9.1 Assembly overview - curtain airbag”, page 131
⇒ “9.2 Removing and installing curtain airbag with igniter”,
page 131
9.1 Assembly overview - curtain airbag
1 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 5
2 - Bolt
❑ 4.5 Nm
3 - Curtain airbag
❑ Driver side: with driver
side curtain airbag ignit‐
er - N251- .
side curtain airbag ignit‐
er - N252- .
⇒ page 131
WARNING
4 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 3
5 - Line to prevent twisting
❑ Is used to ensure that
curtain airbag is not
twisted.
❑ Must be entirely visible
after installation.
9.2 Removing and installing curtain airbag

with igniter
9. Curtain airbags 131

♦ Release tool - VAS 1978/17- from release tool case - VAS

1978/35-
♦ Wedges - T10383-

♦ Removal lever - 80 - 200-
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe the additional safety instructions for the curtain
airbag ⇒ page 5 .
⇒ page 4 .

Caution


– Remove wheel housing trim ⇒ page 242 .
– Remove C-pillar trims ⇒ page 237 .

For Saloon only

– Remove brackets for C-pillar trims.
Note
When carrying out the steps below, make sure that the release
pliers - VAS 6427- are positioned centrally in retaining clip.
– Release retaining clip -arrow- using release pliers - VAS

6427- .
– Lift bracket -1-, and pull it out of C-pillar.
For Estate only
– Remove D-pillar trims ⇒ page 241 .
Vehicles with sunroof
– Open sliding sunroof completely.
– Open sun blind at about 2/3.
– Clean removal lever - 80 - 200- to prevent the moulded head‐

liner from getting soiled.
– Run removal lever - 80 - 200- between trim frame on sliding

sunroof -2- and moulded headliner -1- until you feel one of the
retaining clips -3-.
– Using removal lever - 80 - 200- , unclip trim frame from sliding
sunroof -2- all round in area of retaining clips -3- -arrow-.
Continued for all vehicles
– Remove upper A-pillar trims ⇒ page 224 .
– Detach B-pillar trims on top and leave them attached at the
bottom. Do not remove belt end fitting ⇒ page 233 .
– Remove sun visors ⇒ page 36 .
– Remove sun visor centre mount ⇒ page 37 .
– Remove storage compartment in roof headliner ⇒ page 30 .
– Remove roof grab handle ⇒ page 38 .
– Disconnect connector for moulded headliner wiring harness
behind storage compartment in moulded headliner.
Caution
♦ The moulded headliner is easily kinked.

♦ If kinked, the headliner must be renewed.
Note

– Using release pliers - VAS 6427- , release retaining clips -2-

in retaining frame for moulded headliner -1- from body mount‐
ings.
– Hold moulded headliner -1- in such a way -arrows- that re‐
leased retaining clips -2- do not engage again.
– With aid of second mechanic, carefully hold moulded headlin‐
er -1- in position.
For Saloon only

– Release retaining clips -2- at rear end of moulded headliner
-1- using wedges - T10383- .
For Estate only

– Release roof end strip -1- in area of retaining clips from body
mountings using wedge - T10383- .
– Remove roof end strip -1- downwards.
– Place moulded headliner on dash panel and on head restraints
of front or rear seats as applicable.

– Detach retaining clips -1- in retaining tabs for curtain airbag

from body.
– To do this, carefully fit »tip« -arrow- of release tool - VAS
1978/17- into recess -A- as far as stop, as shown in illustration.
– Pull left side of retaining clip out of body.
– Pull release tool - VAS 1978/17- out of retaining clip ensuring
that released side of retaining clip does not engage again.
– Turn release tool - VAS 1978/17- by 180°.
– Repeat procedure on recess -B-.

– Unclip retaining clips -2- from A-pillar.
WARNING

– Pull out connector lock and pull connector -1- off curtain airbag
-2- -arrow-.
– Unscrew bolt -3- on curtain airbag.
– Initially, detach curtain airbag -1- at front from body mounting

-arrow B- and push it towards rear.
– Then, detach curtain airbag at rear from body mounting
-arrow A- and remove it.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Always follow steps of procedure for installing curtain air‐
bag in the given order.
– Initially, fit curtain airbag -1- at rear into body mounting

-arrow A- and push it towards front.
– Then, fit curtain airbag at front into body mounting -arrow B-.

– Secure curtain airbag in place using bolt -1-

– Clip in retaining clips for curtain airbag until they can be heard
to engage. Start at gas generator and continue towards front
and rear.
– Pull on retaining clips to ensure they are properly engaged.
– Connect connector to curtain airbag igniter.
– Press in connector lock. Doing so, the connector will be fully
inserted into curtain airbag igniter and locked at the same time.
– Ensure that the line to prevent twisting is visible over the entire
length and that it is straight. This will ensure that the curtain
airbag is NOT twisted.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note

tion, event memory must be read, deleted and read again ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “9.1 Assembly overview - curtain airbag”, page 131

10 Knee airbags
⇒ “10.1 Assembly overview - knee airbag”, page 139
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing knee airbag with igniter”,
page 140
10.1 Assembly overview - knee airbag
1 - Knee airbag with driver side

knee airbag igniter - N295- .
⇒ page 140
Caution
Any risk of damage to the
knee airbag surface due
to mechanical stress
must be eliminated.
After
♦ completion of work,
perform a visual check to
ensure that the surface of
the knee airbag (particu‐
larly in the area of the
perforation) is undam‐
aged.
2 - Contact point
❑ For knee airbag
Caution
Eliminate any risk of fail‐
ure due to a faulty earth
connection.
Thread
♦ and contact sur‐
face must be free of
paint, coatings and corro‐
sion.
The
♦ bolted connection is
used as earth connection
for the knee airbag.
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 3
❑ 8 Nm
❑ For driver side knee airbag igniter - N295- .
10. Knee airbags 139

10.2 Removing and installing knee airbag

with igniter
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
⇒ page 4 .
♦ Note allocation of airbag unit to dash panel ⇒ Electronic
parts catalogue .

Caution


– Pull out steering wheel completely, push it upwards, and lock
it.
– Unscrew bolts -2- for steering column through opening in dash
panel.
– Remove driver side knee airbag -1- towards rear.
WARNING

– Disconnect connector -3- on driver side knee airbag igniter -

N295- .
– To do this, release connector lock -4- using a small screw‐
driver -arrow- and pull off connector.
WARNING
Place airbag aside in such a way that the impact padding points
upwards.

Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Note allocation of airbags to dash panel ⇒ Electronic parts
catalogue .

time.
Note

Caution
Any risk of damage to the knee airbag surface due to mechan‐

ical stress must be eliminated.
♦ After completion of the repair work perform a visual check
to ensure that the knee airbag surface is not damaged.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
10. Knee airbags 141

Note

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “10.1 Assembly overview - knee airbag”, page 139

11 Airbag crash sensors

⇒ “11.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag crash sensors”, page
143
⇒ “11.2 Removing and installing front airbag crash sensor, driver
side G190 ”, page 144
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing front side airbag crash sensor
G179 / G180 ”, page 146
⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag crash sensor
G256 / G257 ”, page 149
11.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag crash sensors
1 - Side airbag crash sensor,

front passenger side - G180-
❑ Location: in door
❑ Safety precautions
when handling crash
sensors (pressure sen‐
sors) for front side air‐
bags ⇒ page 6
⇒ page 146
2 - Rear side airbag crash sen‐
sor, front passenger side -
G257-
❑ Fitting location: beneath
wheel housing trim
⇒ page 149
3 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
4 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
5 - Rear side airbag crash sen‐
sor, driver side - G256-
❑ Fitting location: beneath
wheel housing trim
⇒ page 149
6 - Side airbag crash sensor,
driver side - G179-
❑ Location: in door
❑ Safety precautions
when handling crash
sensors (pressure sen‐
sors) for front side airbags ⇒ page 6
7 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
8 - Crash sensor for front airbag - G190-
❑ Fitting location: on lock carrier in centre of vehicle.
11. Airbag crash sensors 143

11.2 Removing and installing front airbag

crash sensor, driver side - G190-
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
Risk of injury due to automatic engine starting in vehicles with
a start/stop system.
♦ In vehicles with an activated start/stop system (indicated
by a message in the dash panel insert), the engine may
start automatically.
♦ When working on the vehicle, make sure that the start/stop
system is deactivated (switch off the ignition; switch the
ignition on again if necessary).

Caution

– Open bonnet.
– Unscrew bolt -arrow- on left and right.
– Unclip air duct -1-, and remove it.

– Unscrew bolt -2-, and remove crash sensor -3- for front airbag
from lock carrier.
WARNING

– Separate electrical connector -1-.
– Pull out connector lock -2-, press it down -arrow- and discon‐
nect connector -1- on crash sensor.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .

– Push connector -1- onto crash sensor until it engages audibly

-arrow-.
– Press in connector lock -2- to lock the connector.
Note

WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “11.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag crash sensors”,
page 143
11.3 Removing and installing front side air‐

bag crash sensor -G179- / -G180-
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe safety precautions for crash sensors (pressure
sensors) for front side airbags ⇒ page 6 .


Caution

– Remove front door trim ⇒ page 158 .
WARNING

– Release catch -2- and turn locking element -1- for crash sen‐
sor anti-clockwise by approx. 45° -arrow-.
– Detach side airbag crash sensor -3- from door and remove it.

Installing
WARNING
For the crash sensor (pressure sensor) to function properly, it

is vital to ensure that the door forms an effective seal.
– Ensure proper seating of seal -2-. Renew crash sensor if dam‐

aged or deformed.
– Attach side airbag crash sensor in door.
– Turn locking element -1- for crash sensor clockwise -arrow-.
• Locking lug -3- must engage audibly.
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Observe safety precautions for crash sensors (pressure
sensors) for front side airbags ⇒ page 6 .


-arrow-.
Note

WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note

11.4 Removing and installing rear side airbag

crash sensor -G256- / -G257-
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
♦ Before handling pyrotechnic components (e.g. separating


Caution


– Unscrew bolt -1- and remove crash sensor -2- for side airbag
from body.
WARNING

– Disconnect connector -3-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .


-arrow-.
Note

WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
WARNING
position.
Note

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “11.1 Overview of fitting locations - airbag crash sensors”,
page 143

12 Seat belt verification

⇒ “12.1 Removing and installing Seat occupied sensor, front pas‐
senger side G128 ”, page 152
12.1 Removing and installing Seat occupied

sensor, front passenger side - G128-
Note
The seat occupied sensor is only installed in the front passenger

seat.
Removing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ page 327 .

– Remove seat trim on tunnel side ⇒ page 335 .
– Remove backrest adjustment ⇒ page 358 .
– Remove handle for seat height adjustment ⇒ page 353 .
– Remove seat trim on sill side ⇒ page 337 .
– Remove bracket for seat trim on sill side ⇒ page 341 .
– Detach front beading strip of seat cover from seat pan.
– Detach beading strips on sides of seat cover from seat pan.
– Fold up padding with cover.

– Disconnect connector for seat occupied sensor.

– Unclip clips -1- from seat pan and remove seat occupied sen‐
sor -2-.
Installing
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
Caution
Install the new seat occupied sensor at the installation location

of the old seat occupied sensor.

– Press clips for seat occupied sensor into seat pan until they
engage audibly.
Note
and engage audibly.
WARNING

connecting battery.

necting battery .
Caution

12. Seat belt verification 153

WARNING
position.
Note


70 – Trim, insulation
1 Front door trims
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - front door trim”, page 155
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing trim”, page 156
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing front door trim”, page 158
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing front armrest”, page 163
1.1 Assembly overview - front door trim
Note
The assembly overview is shown for the front door trim on driver
side. The assembly overview for the front passenger side is anal‐
ogous.
1 - Front door trim

⇒ page 158
2 - Trim panel
❑ With driver side interior
locking button for cen‐
tral locking system -
E308- .
parts catalogue
⇒ page 156
3 - Central locking SAFELOCK
function warning lamp - K133-
❑ Driver door only
tions ⇒ Electrical sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Lights; Overview of fit‐
ting locations - lights in
front doors .
4 - Adjuster element
❑ Is used for adjusting
door trim
❑ Turn 90° until desired
position has been ach‐
ieved, and re-engage in
door trim
❑ Discontinued on vehi‐
cles manufactured later
❑ If a door is replaced and
the old door trim is
reused, the adjuster el‐
ement must be removed
from the door trim and a
felt bonded in the appropriate place; allocation: ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue
1. Front door trims 155

5 - Cover for adjuster element

6 - Carrier
7 - Bolt
❑ For securing door trim, top
❑ 4.5 Nm
8 - Trim panel for door puller
9 - Upper cover
❑ For securing door trim
10 - Lower cover
11 - Front arm rest
12 - Bolt
❑ For securing door trim, bottom
❑ 4.5 Nm
13 - Operating unit for window regulator in driver door - E512-
❑ With exterior mirror adjuster - EX11-
❑ Overview of fitting locations ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls; Overview of fitting locations -
controls in front doors .
14 - Rear lid remote release button - E233-
❑ Overview of fitting locations ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls; Overview of fitting locations -
controls in front doors .
15 - Reflector
❑ Door warning lamp
16 - Rotary clip
❑ Turn/release 90° (1/4 turn)
❑ Qty. 1
17 - Clip
❑ Qty. 5
❑ Insert into trim
❑ Renew any damaged or deformed clips.
18 - Crash clip
❑ Qty. 1
1.2 Removing and installing trim
Note
Removal and installation is described for the trim panel on driver

propriate.
156 Rep. gr.70 - Trim, insulation

Removing
– Remove front door trim ⇒ page 158 .
– Pull off connector for driver side interior locking button for cen‐
tral locking system - E308- .
– Depending on vehicle equipment, pull off connector for ambi‐
ent lighting.
– Remove bolts -3- of trim panel -2-.

– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully detach trim panel

-2-, and remove it from door trim.
Installing
– Insert new trim panel -2- into door trim -1-, and bolt it on.
– Reconnect connectors.
– Install front door trim ⇒ page 158 .
Torque settings
Bolts for trim panel 1.5 Nm
1.3 Removing and installing front door trim
Note
Removal and installation are described for the front door trim on
driver side. Follow same instructions for the front passenger side
as appropriate.

♦ Wedges - T10383-

Removing
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers, and withdraw
ignition key.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , lever caps -1- and -2- out of
mountings in armrest.

– Release rotary clip -1- using a 10 mm open-end spanner or a

Torx screwdriver T30 by turning it 90° (1/4 turn) in
• Rotary clip -arrow- is released.

– Detach retaining clips -3- of door trim -1- from mountings using
wedges - T10383- . Clip -4- has already been released.
Note
♦ The adjuster element -2- is used to adjust the height of the door trim panel -1-. It is not necessary to release
the adjuster element; just guide it through a sealing grommet in the inner door panel.
♦ Clip -5- is a crash clip. The crash clip is released automatically when the door trim panel -1- is detached
from the window slot seal.
– Pull door trim -1- upwards vertically out of window slot seal.
This will automatically release the crash clip -5-.
– Disconnect the electrical plug-in connections from the door
trim -1- in accordance with the vehicle's equipment.

– Unhook Bowden cable -1- from inner door handle.

Installing
Note

necessary.

– Insert retaining clips into front door trim.
Caution
Before installing door trim, ensure that the locking mechanisms

of all clips are in -position 1-.
It is not possible to install the door trim without problem if clips
are in -position 2-!

If the door trim is not aligned flush with the dash panel, a slight
vertical adjustment can be achieved using the adjuster element
-1-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , lever cover -3- out of mountings
in door trim panel.
– Release fastener -2- -arrow A-, and pull adjuster element -1-
out of door trim panel.
– Turn adjuster element -1- 90° (1/4 turn) -arrow B- or
-arrow C-.
♦ -Arrow B-: vertically adjust front door trim panel by moving it
2 mm downwards
♦ -Arrow C-: vertically adjust front door trim panel by moving it
2 mm upwards
– Insert adjuster element -1- in new position into door trim panel
until it engages audibly.
– Clip cover -3- into door trim panel.
Torque settings
2 bolts on door puller 4.5 Nm
1.4 Removing and installing front armrest
Note
Removal and installation are described for the armrest on driver

propriate.
Removing
– Remove door trim ⇒ page 158 .
ent lighting.
– Remove bolts -6- and -7- of armrest -4-.
– Release armrest -4-, and detach it from door trim.
– Remove bolts -5-.
– Carefully separate base carrier -3- from armrest -4-.
Installing
Torque setting
Bolts for armrest 1.5 Nm

2 Rear door trims

⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - rear door trim”, page 164
⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - sun blind for door window”,
page 165
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing trim”, page 166
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing rear door trim”, page 168
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing rear arm rest”, page 171
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing sun blind for door window”,
page 172
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing eyelet for sun blind”, page 173
2.1 Assembly overview - rear door trim
Note
The assembly overview is shown for the rear door trim on driver side. The assembly overview for the front
passenger side is analogous.
1 - Rear door trim

⇒ page 168
2 - Trim panel
⇒ page 166
3 - Trim panel for door puller
4 - Rotary clip
❑ Turn/release 90° (1/4
turn)
❑ Qty. 1
5 - Reflector
❑ Door warning lamp
6 - Upper cover
7 - Bolt
❑ 4.5 Nm
8 - Lower cover
9 - Armrest
⇒ page 171
10 - Carrier
11 - Window regulator switch in
rear door
❑ Driver side: rear left win‐
dow regulator switch, in
door - E52-

❑ Front passenger side: rear right window regulator switch, in door - E54-
12 - Clip
❑ Qty. 6
❑ Renew any damaged or deformed clips.
2.2 Assembly overview - sun blind for door window
Note
The illustration shows the rear left sun blind.
1 - Sun blind
❑ For door window
⇒ page 172
2 - Eyelet
❑ For sun blind
⇒ page 173
3 - Bolt
❑ For eyelet
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.3 Nm
4 - Bolt
❑ For sun blind
❑ Qty. 8
❑ 2 Nm
5 - Guide strip
⇒ page 172
6 - Rear door trim
⇒ page 168
2. Rear door trims 165

2.3 Removing and installing trim
Note
Removal and installation is described for the trim panel on driver

propriate.

Removing
– Remove door trim ⇒ page 168 .

– Pull off connector for treble loudspeaker.

ent lighting.
– Remove bolts -3- of trim panel -2-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully detach trim panel
-2-, and remove it from door trim -1-.
Installing
– Insert new trim panel -2- into door trim -1-, and bolt it on.
– Reconnect connectors.
– Install front door trim ⇒ page 158 .
Torque settings
Bolts for trim panel 1.5 Nm

2.4 Removing and installing rear door trim
Note
Removal and installation is described for the rear door trim on

driver side. Follow same instructions for the front passenger side
as appropriate.

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers, and withdraw
ignition key.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , lever cap -2- out of mountings
at upper end of door puller.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , lever cap -3- out of mountings
at lower end of door puller.

– Remove reflector ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights;

Overview of fitting locations - lights in rear doors .
– Release rotary clip -1- with Torx screwdriver T30 by turning it
90° (1/4 turn) in -direction of arrow-.

– Detach retaining clips -2- of door trim -1- from mountings using
wedges - T10383- . Clip -3- has already been released.
– Pull door trim -1- upwards vertically out of window slot seal.
– Disconnect the electrical plug-in connections from the door
trim -1- in accordance with the vehicle's equipment.
– Unhook Bowden cable -1- from inner door handle.
Installing
Note

necessary.

– Insert retaining clips into rear door trim.

Caution
Before installing door trim, ensure that the locking mechanisms

of all clips are in -position 1-.
It is not possible to install the door trim without problem if clips
are in -position 2-!
Torque settings
2 bolts on door puller 4.5 Nm
2.5 Removing and installing rear arm rest
Note
Removal and installation are described for the armrest on driver

propriate.


Removing
– Remove door trim -1- ⇒ page 158 .
– Detach insulation of door trim -1-.
ent lighting.
– Remove bolts -6- and -7- of armrest -4-.
– Release armrest -4-, and detach it from door trim -1-.
– Remove bolts -5-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully detach carrier -3- from
armrest -4-.
Installing
Torque setting
Bolts for armrest 1.5 Nm
2.6 Removing and installing sun blind for

door window

Removing
– Remove rear door trim ⇒ page 168 .
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully unclip guide strip -2-
from door trim -arrow-.
– Pull sun blind -1- out of door trim -3- slightly, and remove tab
through guide strip.
– Swing sun blind -1- slightly towards outside to detach it from
door trim.
– Guide tab for sun blind through gap in door trim -3- and re‐
move.
Installing
– Guide strip can be inserted in door trim in only one position.
Specified torque
♦ ⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - sun blind for door window”,
page 165
2.7 Removing and installing eyelet for sun

blind

Removing
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , fold up covers on eyelet -1-.
– Unscrew bolts -3-, and remove eyelet -2- from window frame.
Installing
Torque setting
♦ ⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - sun blind for door window”,
page 165

3 Dash panel
⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - dash panel”, page 175
⇒ “3.2 Assembly overview - cover and trim for head-up display”,
page 176
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing dash panel end cover”,
page 177
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing dash panel trim”, page 177
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing radio/navigation system blanking
plate”, page 180
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing dash panel insert trim”,
page 181
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing dash panel”, page 183
⇒ “3.8 Removing and installing dash panel vents”, page 192
⇒ “3.9 Removing and installing trim for head-up display”,
page 195
⇒ “3.10 Removing and installing cover for head-up display”, page
196
3.1 Assembly overview - dash panel
1 - Rubber buffer
❑ Qty. 3
❑ Slide onto dash panel
mountings on lower
windscreen frame.
2 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
3 - Sunlight penetration photo‐
sensor - G107-
⇒ Heating, air condi‐
tioning; Rep. gr. 87 ;
Other control compo‐
nents; Removing and in‐
stalling sunlight pene‐
tration photo sensor -
G107-
4 - Dash panel
⇒ page 183
5 - Dash panel trim panel
❑ Passenger side
parts catalogue
⇒ page 177
6 - Dash panel vent
❑ Passenger side
⇒ page 192
3. Dash panel 175

7 - Mounting frame for radio/navigation system

8 - Dash panel insert
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 90 ; Dash panel insert; Removing and installing
dash panel insert - KX2-
9 - Rotary light switch - EX1-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Controls; Overview of fitting locations - controls
in dash panel
10 - Dash panel trim panel
❑ Driver side
❑ Allocation ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue
11 - Dash panel vent
❑ Driver side
3.2 Assembly overview - cover and trim for head-up display
1 - Head-up display trim

⇒ page 195
2 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Observe specific order
when installing bolts
3 - Cover for head-up display
⇒ page 196

3.3 Removing and installing dash panel end

cover
Note
Removal and installation is described for the dash panel end cov‐
er on driver side. Follow same instructions for the front passenger
side as appropriate.

Removing
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , lever off dash panel end cover
-1- in area of fasteners -arrows-.
– If fitted, disconnect connector on key operated switch to de‐
activate front passenger side airbag - E224- .
– Pull cover towards rear out of A-pillar gap cover and remove
it.
Installing
Note

necessary.
3.4 Removing and installing dash panel trim

⇒ “3.4.1 Removing and installing dash panel trim with background
lighting”, page 177
⇒ “3.4.2 Removing and installing dash panel trim without back‐
ground lighting”, page 179
3.4.1 Removing and installing dash panel trim

with background lighting
3. Dash panel 177

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing, driver side

– Remove dash panel end cover on driver side ⇒ page 177 .
– Open driver side storage compartment -1- in
– Release driver side storage compartment -1- from upper
catches and remove it at bottom from dash panel -2-.
Note
The electrical connector of the “background lighting” can be ac‐

cessed through the side opening and the opening of the removed
storage compartment.

– Using removal wedge - 10383/1- , carefully release trim -1-

from fasteners at sides. Disconnect electrical connector.
Installing (driver side)
Note

necessary.

Removing, front passenger side
Note
The electrical connector of the “background lighting” can be ac‐

cessed through the opening of the removed glove compartment.

⇒ page 180 .
tronics - J794- .
– Removing and installing glove compartment ⇒ page 27 .
– Using removal wedge - 10383- , carefully release trim -1- from

fasteners, working from outside towards inside. Disconnect
wiring harness of “ambient lighting”.
– On Passat 2015► and Passat Estate 2015► vehicle models,
disconnect electrical connectors of switch unit.
Installing (front passenger side)
Note

necessary.
3.4.2 Removing and installing dash panel trim

without background lighting
♦ Wedges - T10383-
3. Dash panel 179

Removing, driver side

– Using removal wedge - 10383/1- , carefully release trim panel
-1- from fasteners at sides.
Installing (driver side)
Note

necessary.

Removing, front passenger side
– Using removal wedge - 10383- , carefully release trim panel

-1- from fasteners, working from outside towards inside.
– On Passat 2015► and Passat Estate 2015► vehicle models,
disconnect electrical connectors of switch unit.
Installing (front passenger side)
Note

necessary.
3.5 Removing and installing radio/naviga‐

tion system blanking plate
Removing
– Carefully release mounting frame -1- from clip fasteners
-arrows-.

Installing
Note

necessary.
3.6 Removing and installing dash panel in‐

sert trim
⇒ “3.6.1 Removing and installing dash panel insert trim with an‐
alogue instruments”, page 181
⇒ “3.6.2 Removing and installing fully digital dash panel insert
trim”, page 182
3.6.1 Removing and installing dash panel in‐

sert trim with analogue instruments
3. Dash panel 181

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Pull out steering wheel completely, push it down, and lock it.
– Carefully unclip gap cover of steering column trim from mount‐
ings in dash panel insert.
– Using wedges - T10383- , unclip dash panel insert trim -1- at
sides in lower section from dash panel insert -2- -arrows A-.
sides from dash panel insert -2- -arrows B-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , unclip dash panel insert trim
-1- at top from dash panel insert -2- -arrows C-.
Installing
Note

necessary.
3.6.2 Removing and installing fully digital

dash panel insert trim

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Pull out steering wheel completely, push it down, and lock it.
– Carefully unclip gap cover of steering column trim from mount‐
ings in dash panel insert.
sides from dash panel insert -2-.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , unclip dash panel insert trim
-1- at top from dash panel insert -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

3. Dash panel 183

Removing
– Remove lower steering column trim ⇒ page 22 .
– Remove dash panel insert ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 90 ;
Dash panel insert; Removing and installing dash panel insert
- KX2- .
– If present, remove control unit for head-up display - J898- ⇒
Electrical system; Rep. gr. 90 ; Dash panel insert; Removing
and installing control unit for head-up display
– Remove driver side airbag ⇒ page 116 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep.
gr. 48 ; Steering wheel; Removing and installing steering
wheel .
– Remove steering column switch ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr.
94 ; Steering column switch module; Removing and installing
steering column switch module .
– Remove rotary light switch - EX1- ⇒ Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 96 ; Controls; Overview of fitting locations - controls in dash
panel .
– Remove dash panel cover on driver side ⇒ page 19 .
– Remove dash panel end covers ⇒ page 177 .
⇒ page 180 .
– Remove dash panel trim panel on front passenger side
⇒ page 177 .
– Remove trim for display unit for front information display and
operating unit control unit - J685- ⇒ Communication; Rep. gr.
91 ; Infotainment system; Overview of fitting locations - Info‐
tainment system .


tronics - J794- .
– Remove trim for operating and display unit ⇒ page 46 .
– Remove operating and display unit ⇒ Heating, air condition‐
ing; Rep. gr. 87 ; Operating and display unit; Removing and
installing operating and display unit .
– Remove A-pillar gap covers ⇒ page 224 .
– On vehicles with centre loudspeaker - R208- , use removal
wedge - 3409- to carefully unclip loudspeaker trim -1- from
mountings in dash panel -2-.

– Pull centre loudspeaker - R208- -1- upwards out of dash panel
until connector becomes accessible.
– Release and disconnect connector on centre loudspeaker -
R208- -1-.
– Remove centre loudspeaker - R208- -1-.
– If present, unclip sunlight penetration photosensor - G107-

-1- upwards from dash panel.
– Release and disconnect connector.
– On vehicles with “Climatronic”, release and disconnect con‐
nectors of left vent temperature sender - G150- and right vent
temperature sender - G151- .
– Disconnect connector for front-passenger airbag.
3. Dash panel 185

– To do this release connector lock -2- using a small screwdriver

-arrow- and pull off connector -1-.
– Move front seats to rearmost position.
– On front passenger side, unscrew bolts -1 to 4- securing dash

panel -5-.

– Unscrew bolts -1 to 6- securing dash panel -7-.
3. Dash panel 187

– Lift up dash panel -1- until locating lugs on left and right
-arrow A- are released from mountings.
– Pull dash panel -1- out of 3 mountings -2- at transition to wind‐
screen.

Note
Help of a second mechanic is required to remove the dash panel from vehicle.
– Remove dash panel -1- from dash panel central tube -2-.
– Disconnect connectors and lay wiring harnesses on dash pan‐
el to one side.
– Carefully remove dash panel from vehicle interior and place it
on a soft surface.
Installing
Note

necessary.
Only vehicles without centre loudspeaker - R208- and without in‐

direct ventilation mode.
3. Dash panel 189

– Seal openings for loudspeaker and indirect ventilation mode

below loudspeaker trim -1- with an “insulation” as per ⇒ Elec‐
tronic Parts Catalogue .
Note
Cut the “insulation” to the appropriate size for the openings.
For all vehicles
– Before installing dash panel -1-, check whether mountings

-2- are firmly engaged in body.
– With the aid of a 2nd mechanic push dash panel -1- into the
three mountings -2- at transition to windscreen.
– Insert dash panel with locating lugs on left and right
-arrow A- exactly into corresponding holes.
– Connect connectors, and secure wiring harnesses to dash
panel working in the reverse order of removal.

– Secure dash panel -7- with six bolts in sequence -6-, -5-, -4-,
-3-, -2- and -1-.
3. Dash panel 191

– On front passenger side, secure dash panel -5- with four bolts
in sequence -4-, -3-, -2- and -1-.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - dash panel”, page 175
Bolts on centre loudspeaker - R208- 2 Nm

vents

Removing dash panel vent on driver side

– Remove dash panel end cover on driver side ⇒ page 177 .
– Remove dash panel trim panel on driver side ⇒ page 177 .
– Remove trim of dash panel insert ⇒ page 181 .
3. Dash panel 193

– Unscrew bolts -1- for dash panel vent -2-.

– Disconnect connector of temperature sensor -2- in dash panel
vent at side.
– Remove dash panel vent from dash panel.
Installing dash panel vent on driver side
Caution
The description below is applicable only for a certain number

of vehicles which were manufactured before 01.12.2014.
If the vent is replaced by a new part, the aperture in the dash
panel may be slightly too small.
If the aperture is too small, slightly extend the radius at bottom
right of the rectangular aperture in the dash panel using suita‐
ble workshop equipment.
Note

necessary.

Bolts for securing dash panel 1.5 Nm
vent to dash panel
Removing, dash panel vent on front passenger side
– Remove trim of dash panel insert ⇒ page 181 .
– Remove dash panel trim panel on front passenger side
⇒ page 177 .
⇒ page 180 .
– Remove trim for display unit for front information display and
operating unit control unit - J685- ⇒ Communication; Rep. gr.
91 ; Infotainment system; Overview of fitting locations - Info‐
tainment system .
tronics - J794- .

– Unscrew the three bolts -2-.

– Unscrew the two bolts -3-.
– Unscrew the two bolts -4-.
– Disconnect connector above glove compartment.
– If wiring harness is too short, remove glove compartment
⇒ page 27 .
– Remove dash panel vent on front passenger side -1- from
dash panel.
Installing dash panel vent on front passenger side
Note

necessary.

Bolts for securing dash panel 1.5 Nm
vent to dash panel
3.9 Removing and installing trim for head-

up display
3. Dash panel 195

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Carefully detach and raise trim for head-up display -1- using
wedge -T10383/1- .
– Pull out trim for head-up display -1- from dash panel -2- and
remove upwards.
Installing
Further installation is carried out in reverse order of removal. Ob‐
serve the following when doing this:
Note

necessary.
3.10 Removing and installing cover for head-

up display
Removing
Note
The removal and installation procedure is described for left-hand

drive vehicles. Removal and installation for right-hand drive ve‐
hicles are similar.
– Move steering wheel to rearmost and lowest position. Use the

full range of the steering column adjustment for this purpose.

– Store the ignition key outside the vehicle to prevent the ignition
from being switched on unintentionally.
– Carefully unclip gap cover of steering column trim upwards out
of mountings on dash panel insert - do not remove completely
⇒ page 22 .
– Remove dash panel insert - KX2- ⇒ Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 90 ; Dash panel insert; Removing and installing dash panel
insert - KX2- .
– Remove control unit for head-up display - J898- ⇒ Electrical
system; Rep. gr. 90 ; Dash panel insert; Removing and in‐
stalling control unit for head-up display
Note
Before removing the cover for the head-up display, make abso‐
lutely sure that the area underneath is covered (e.g. with a cloth)
so that no bolts can fall through.
– Unscrew bolts -1-, -2-, -3- and -4-, and swivel cover for head-
up display -5- out of dash panel.
– Separate electrical connector and remove cover for head-up
display -5- from dash panel.
Installing
Note
♦ Before installing, check all fasteners for damage and renew if

necessary.
♦ Before installing the cover for the head-up display, make ab‐
solutely sure that the area underneath is covered (e.g. with
cloths) so that no bolts can fall through.
– Bolt cover for head-up display -5- in respective mountings as

per the following sequence:
♦ Bolt -2-
♦ Bolt -4-
♦ Bolt -3-
♦ Bolt -1-
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ page 176
3. Dash panel 197

4 Central tube for dash panel

⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - central tube for dash panel”,
page 198
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing crash bar”, page 199
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing dash panel cross member”, page
200
4.1 Assembly overview - central tube for dash panel
Note
If electrical wires are disconnected or removed and installed, it is useful to make corresponding drawings or
photos. This guarantees that everything is re-installed in its original position.
1 - Mounting bracket
❑ Welded to body
2 - Threaded pin
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 20 Nm
3 - Bolt
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Cross member
❑ For dash panel
⇒ page 200
Caution
If the centre tube is re‐
newed, malfunctions
due to poor earthing may
occur.
The
♦ earth points must be
free of paint, coatings
and corrosion in order to
ensure flawless earth
connections.
Threads
♦ and contact sur‐
faces between the cen‐
tral tube and securing
brackets must also be
free of paint, coatings
and corrosion. Threaded
connections are used as
an earth connection for
the knee airbag.
The
♦ contact surfaces be‐
tween the left and right
tunnel supports and the
tunnel must be paint-free
on both sides. They
serve as primary earthing
paths.
5 - Nut
❑ Qty. 2

❑ 20 Nm
Caution
Risk of malfunctions due
to poor earthing.
The
♦ contact surface must
be free of paint, coatings
and corrosion. The bol‐
ted connection is used as
earth connection for the
knee airbag.
6 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 3
❑ 4 Nm
❑ If one of the bolts is over-tightened when installing the heater and air conditioning unit, use bolt “N.
911.981.01” as a replacement part.
7 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 20 Nm
8 - Bolt
❑ 20 Nm
9 - Crash bar
10 - Bolt
❑ Driver side only
❑ 20 Nm
Caution
Risk of malfunctions due
to poor earthing.
The
♦ contact surface must
be free of paint, coatings
and corrosion. The bol‐
ted connection is used as
earth connection for the
knee airbag.
4.2 Removing and installing crash bar

4. Central tube for dash panel 199

Removing
– Remove knee airbag with igniter ⇒ page 140 .
– Remove footwell vent on driver side ⇒ Heating, air condition‐
ing system; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct system; Assembly overview
- air duct system and air distribution in passenger compart‐
ment .
– Remove data bus diagnostic interface - J533- ⇒ Electrical
system; Rep. gr. 97 ; Control units; Overview of fitting loca‐
tions - control units .
– Unscrew bolt -2-, detach crash bar -1- and thread it out.
Installing
– Attach crash bar -2- on central tube -1- -arrow- and bolt it on.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - central tube for dash panel”, page
198

cross member

Note
If electrical wires are disconnected or removed and installed, it is

useful to make corresponding drawings or photos. This guaran‐
tees that everything is re-installed in its original position.
Removing
– Remove left plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber bulkhead; Assembly
overview - plenum chamber cover .
– Unscrew bolt -1- for crash bar and central tube on plenum
chamber bulkhead.
– Remove dash panel ⇒ page 183 .
– Remove knee airbag with igniter ⇒ page 140 .
– Remove footwell vent on driver side ⇒ Heating, air condition‐
ing system; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct system; Assembly overview
- air duct system and air distribution in passenger compart‐
ment .
– Remove data bus diagnostic interface - J533- ⇒ Electrical
system; Rep. gr. 97 ; Control units; Overview of fitting loca‐
tions - control units .


– Unhook load distributor -3- on central tube for dash panel.
– Unbolt steering column from dash panel central tube and place
it on vehicle floor ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr.
48 ; Steering column; Removing and installing steering col‐
umn .
– If fitted, remove interface for entry and start authorisation -
J965- ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 97 ; Control units; Over‐
view of fitting locations - control units .
– Release expanding rivet -1- and remove upwards.

– Remove intermediate piece for defroster function vent -3- from
dash panel central tube.
– Unclip intermediate piece for centre vent -2- from heater and
air conditioning unit, and remove it.
– Unscrew nut -1- on earth point of central tube -2-, and lay
electrical wires to one side.
– Remove footwell vent on front passenger side ⇒ Heating, air
conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct; Assembly overview - air
routing and air distribution in passenger compartment .
– Unscrew the 3 bolts -arrows- for heater and air conditioning

unit.

– Push aside floor covering in area of threaded connection. Un‐

screw bolt -2- for dash panel central tube support on left and
right.
Note
Mark vertical and horizontal position on dash panel central tube

for reinstallation.
– In area of nut -1-, use a scriber to mark vertical and horizontal

position of central tube in vehicle on left and right.
– In area of bolt -2-, use a scriber to mark vertical and horizontal
position of central tube in vehicle on left and right.
– Unscrew bolt -1- for dash panel central tube.
– Unscrew nut -2- for dash panel central tube on A-pillar on left
and right.
– Unclip wires on dash panel central tube, detach them, and lay
them to one side.

– Remove wiring harness retainer -2- from dash panel central

tube -1-.
– Detach dash panel central tube -1- and pull it slightly towards
the rear.
– With aid of second mechanic, carefully lift dash panel central
tube -1- out of vehicle. Mind the wiring harnesses while doing
so.
Installing
Note
♦ Before bolting central tube for dash panel in place, align it us‐
ing marks made during removal.
necessary.

Caution
If the centre tube is renewed, malfunctions due to poor earthing

may occur.
♦ The earth points must be free of paint, coatings and cor‐
rosion in order to ensure flawless earth connections.
♦ Threads and contact surfaces between the central tube
and securing brackets must also be free of paint, coatings
and corrosion. Threaded connections are used as an
earth connection for the knee airbag.
♦ The contact surfaces between the left and right tunnel
supports and the tunnel must be paint-free on both sides.
They serve as primary earthing paths.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - central tube for dash panel”, page
198
Nut for earth point on central 9 Nm
tube
3 bolts for load distributor on 4.5 Nm
central tube

5 Interior trims
⇒ “5.1 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims”, page 206
⇒ “5.2 Assembly overview - sill panel moulding”, page 209
⇒ “5.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim”, page 210
⇒ “5.4 Assembly overview - B-pillar trim”, page 212
⇒ “5.5 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim”, page 214
⇒ “5.6 Assembly overview - D-pillar trim”, page 216
⇒ “5.7 Assembly overview - wheel housing trim”, page 216
⇒ “5.8 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering”,
page 218
⇒ “5.9 Assembly overview - rear shelf”, page 220
⇒ “5.10 Assembly overview - sun blind for rear window”,
page 222
⇒ “5.11 Removing and installing sill panel moulding”, page 222
⇒ “5.12 Removing and installing A-pillar gap cover”, page 224
⇒ “5.13 Removing and installing A-pillar trim”, page 224
⇒ “5.14 Removing and installing B-pillar trim”, page 233
⇒ “5.15 Removing and installing C-pillar trim”, page 237
⇒ “5.16 Removing and installing D-pillar trim”, page 241
⇒ “5.17 Removing and installing wheel housing trims”,
page 242
⇒ “5.18 Removing and installing foot rest”, page 244
⇒ “5.19 Removing and installing floor covering”, page 246
⇒ “5.20 Removing and installing rear shelf”, page 247
⇒ “5.21 Removing and installing sun blind for rear window”, page
252
⇒ “5.22 Removing and installing rear roller blind motor -V91-”,
page 252
⇒ “5.23 Removing and installing rear roller blind control unit -
J262-”, page 253
5.1 Overview of fitting locations - interior

trims
⇒ “5.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims, Saloon”, page
206
⇒ “5.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims, Estate”, page
208
5.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims, Saloon

1 - Rear shelf
⇒ page 220 .
⇒ page 247
2 - C-pillar trim
⇒ page 214 .
⇒ page 237
3 - Wheel housing trim
⇒ page 216 .
⇒ page 242
4 - Lower B-pillar trim
⇒ page 212 .
⇒ page 233
5 - Upper part of B-pillar trim
⇒ page 212 .
⇒ page 233
6 - A-pillar gap cover
⇒ page 210 .
⇒ page 224
7 - Upper A-pillar trim
⇒ page 210 .
8 - Sill panel strip
9 - Lower A-pillar trim
5. Interior trims 207

5.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - interior trims, Estate
1 - D-pillar trim
⇒ page 216 .
⇒ page 241
2 - C-pillar trim
⇒ page 215 .
⇒ page 239
⇒ page 212 .
⇒ page 233
⇒ page 210 .
⇒ page 224
⇒ page 210 .
⇒ page 224
⇒ page 210 .
⇒ page 224
⇒ page 212 .

5.2 Assembly overview - sill panel moulding
Note
The illustration shows the sill panel moulding on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of
left-hand side).

⇒ page 222
2 - Retaining clip
❑ Insert into sill panel
moulding.
❑ Remove any retaining
clips left in body mount‐
ings using removal tool -
T40280- and fit them in
sill panel moulding for
installation.
❑ Renew any damaged or
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - Bracket
❑ Insert into body.
4 - Spreader clip

5.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim

⇒ “5.3.1 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, upper A-pillar trim”,
page 210
⇒ “5.3.2 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, LHD
vehicles”, page 211
⇒ “5.3.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, RHD
5.3.1 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, upper A-pillar trim
Note
The illustration shows the A-pillar trims on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand
side).

⇒ page 224
2 - Retaining clip
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - Retaining clip
❑ Two-piece design with
barbs
❑ Base of clip remains in
trim when trim is re‐
moved
❑ Head of clip remains in
body when trim is re‐
moved
❑ Always renew retaining
clips

5.3.2 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, LHD vehicles

⇒ page 224
2 - Clip
⇒ page 224

5.3.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, RHD vehicles

⇒ page 224
2 - Spreader clip
3 - Spreader plug
4 - Nut
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 2 Nm
5 - Bracket
⇒ page 224
⇒ page 224
5.4 Assembly overview - B-pillar trim
Note
The illustration shows the B-pillar trims on the left side. The right-
hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand side).


⇒ page 233
3 - Button for deactivating inte‐
rior monitoring and vehicle in‐
clination sensor - E616-
Rep. gr. 96 ; Anti-theft
alarm system; Assem‐
bly overview - interior
monitoring .
4 - Retaining clips
❑ Qty. 4
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
5 - Retaining clips
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Insert in lower B-pillar
trim
6 - Bolt
❑ 4.5 Nm
7 - Cover
❑ With “airbag” symbol.

5.5 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim

⇒ “5.5.1 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim, Saloon”, page 214
⇒ “5.5.2 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim, Estate”, page 215
5.5.1 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim, Saloon
Note
The illustration shows the C-pillar trim on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand
side).
1 - C-pillar trim
❑ For vehicles without sun
blind for rear window
⇒ page 237
2 - Retaining clip
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - C-pillar trim
❑ For vehicles with sun
blind for rear window
⇒ page 237
4 - Retaining clip
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
5 - Guide rail
❑ Clipped into C-pillar trim
-3-.

5.5.2 Assembly overview - C-pillar trim, Estate
Note
The illustration shows the C-pillar trim on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand
side).
1 - Retaining clip
❑ Insert in C-pillar
clips
2 - Retaining clip
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - C-pillar trim
⇒ page 239
4 - Retaining clip
❑ Renew retaining clip if it
is damaged or deformed

5.6 Assembly overview - D-pillar trim
Note
The illustration shows the D-pillar trim on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand
side).
1 - D-pillar trim
⇒ page 241
2 - Retaining clip
❑ Insert in D-pillar
clips
3 - Retaining clip
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
5.7 Assembly overview - wheel housing trim
Note
The illustration shows the wheel housing trim on the left side. The
right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-hand side).


⇒ page 242
2 - Retaining clips
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - Clamping washer or nut
4 - Clips
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Below sill panel mould‐
ing

5.8 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor

covering
⇒ “5.8.1 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, LHD
⇒ “5.8.2 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, RHD
5.8.1 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, LHD vehicles
1 - Foot rest
⇒ page 244
❑ Must fully engage in
bracket.
2 - Nut
❑ Qty. 3
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Bracket
⇒ page 244
4 - Floor covering
❑ One-piece
⇒ page 246

5.8.2 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, RHD vehicles
1 - Foot rest
⇒ page 245
2 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ Qty. 3
❑ 2 Nm
4 - Bracket
⇒ page 244
5 - Floor covering
❑ One-piece
⇒ page 246

5.9 Assembly overview - rear shelf

⇒ “5.9.1 Assembly overview - rear shelf, without sun blind for rear
window”, page 220
⇒ “5.9.2 Assembly overview - rear shelf, with sun blind for rear
window”, page 221
5.9.1 Assembly overview - rear shelf, without sun blind for rear window
1 - Rear shelf
⇒ page 247
2 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 3
❑ Insert into rear shelf
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - Clip
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Renew clip if damaged
or deformed.

5.9.2 Assembly overview - rear shelf, with sun blind for rear window
1 - Rear shelf, front

⇒ page 248
2 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 3
❑ Insert into rear shelf
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.
3 - Clip
❑ Qty. 2
or deformed.
4 - Rear shelf, rear
⇒ page 248
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm

5.10 Assembly overview - sun blind for rear window
1 - Sun blind
⇒ page 252
2 - Rear shelf, rear
3 - Sunroof sun blind motor
⇒ page 252
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 3 Nm
5 - Nut
❑ Qty. 6
❑ 6 Nm
6 - Control unit for sun blind
⇒ page 253
5.11 Removing and installing sill panel

moulding
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left vehicle side.

Follow same instructions for the right side as appropriate.

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Remove rear bench seat ⇒ page 378 .
– Remove spreader clip -1-.
– Release locking lugs of sill panel moulding -2- from lower B-
pillar trim -3- -arrow A- using wedge - T10383- .
– Release sill panel moulding -1- from side member and beading
of door seal -arrows- using wedge - T10383- .
– At the same time, pull off sill panel moulding -1- slightly to‐
wards front.
– Open cover for belt guide and thread out seat belt.
– Remove sill panel moulding -1-.
Installing
Note

necessary.
♦ Remove any retaining clips left in body mountings using re‐
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in sill panel moulding for
installation.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the sill panel moulding is
positioned in the door seal beading.

5.12 Removing and installing A-pillar gap

cover
Note


Removing
– Remove side dash panel cover ⇒ page 177 .
– Unclip A-pillar gap cover -1- from upper A-pillar trim and lower
A-pillar trim -arrows-.
– Release A-pillar gap cover -1- from door seal beading and re‐
move it.
Installing
Note
Following installation, ensure that the A-pillar gap cover is posi‐

tioned in door seal beading.
5.13 Removing and installing A-pillar trim

⇒ “5.13.1 Removing and installing A-pillar trim, upper A-pillar
trim”, page 224
⇒ “5.13.2 Removing and installing A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim,
driver side, LHD vehicles”, page 227
driver side, RHD vehicles”, page 229
front passenger side”, page 231
5.13.1 Removing and installing A-pillar trim,

upper A-pillar trim

♦ Removal tool - T40280-
Removing
Note

– Remove A-pillar gap cover ⇒ page 224 .

– Using removal wedge - 3409- , detach A-pillar trim -1- at tran‐

sition to moulded headliner -2- from tab of moulded headliner
-arrow a-.
Note
At top, the A-pillar trim is secured to the body with a two-piece panel clip.
– Pull A-pillar trim in area of two-piece clip off body -arrow b-

until the stop of the clip has been attained.
– Push A-pillar trim towards installation position -arrow c-.
Note
This causes the base of the clip to become detached from the head of the two-piece panel clip.
– Pull A-pillar trim off body -arrow d-, and remove it completely.
When pulling off the trim, the head of the clip -3- remains in the
body. The base of the clip -4- remains in the trim; see illustration
“IV”.

– Remove any retaining clips left in body mountings using re‐

moval tool - T40280- , and fit them into trim.
– Remove head of clip -3- from body.
– Remove base of clip -4- from trim.
Installing
Before installing the trim, insert a new two-piece clip at top.
– Insert base of clip -2- into lower grooves of trim -arrows A-.
– Slide head of clip -1- into trim and into base of clip -2-
-arrow c- until tab -arrow b- rests against trim on both sides.
– Insert trim in vehicle, and clip it to body.
Note
Following installation, ensure that the A-pillars trim are positioned

in door seal beading.
5.13.2 Removing and installing A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, driver side, LHD
vehicles
Removing
– Release sill panel moulding from body in area of overlap to
lower trim of A-pillar ⇒ page 222 .

– Remove bonnet operating lever -3- ⇒ General body repairs,

exterior; Rep. gr. 55 ; Bonnet; Removing and installing bonnet
lock operating lever .
– Remove clip -2-.
– Release lower A-pillar trim -1- in -direction of arrow B- from
body. Release lower A-pillar trim from door seal beading while
doing so.
– Remove lower A-pillar trim -1- in -direction of arrow A- from
mounting.
Installing
Note

necessary.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the A-pillars trim are posi‐

5.13.3 Removing and installing A-pillar trim,

lower A-pillar trim, driver side, RHD ve‐
hicles
Removing

– Remove bonnet operating lever -3- ⇒ General body repairs,

exterior; Rep. gr. 55 ; Bonnet; Removing and installing bonnet
lock operating lever .
– Unclip lower A-pillar trim -1- in -direction of arrow A- from
mountings.
– At the same time, release lower A-pillar trim -1- in
-direction of arrow B- from body. Release lower A-pillar trim
from door seal beading while doing so.

– Push floor covering in area of bolted connections aside and

unscrew nuts -arrows-.
– Lift bracket -1- off studs and pull it out from beneath floor cov‐
ering.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.3.3 Assembly overview - A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim,
RHD vehicles”, page 212
5.13.4 Removing and installing A-pillar trim, lower A-pillar trim, front passenger
side
Removing

– Release lower A-pillar trim -1- in -direction of arrow A- from

body. Release lower A-pillar trim from door seal beading while
doing so.
– Remove lower A-pillar trim -1- in -direction of arrow B- from A-
pillar.
Installing
Note

necessary.

5.14 Removing and installing B-pillar trim

⇒ “5.14.1 Removing and installing upper B-pillar trim”,
page 233
⇒ “5.14.2 Removing and installing lower B-pillar trim”, page 235
5.14.1 Removing and installing upper B-pillar

trim
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
Note

– Using a screwdriver, lever cap -3- marked with an “airbag”

symbol out of trim -1-.
– If fitted, unscrew bolt -2-.
– Remove front belt end fitting ⇒ page 96 .

– Move belt height adjuster to lowest position.

– Starting at bottom, detach upper B-pillar trim -1- from door seal
-arrow A-. To do this, fit wedge - T10383- on front edge of trim.
– Unclip upper B-pillar trim -1- from lower B-pillar trim -3-
-arrows B-. To do this, fit wedge - T10383- on lower edge of
trim.
– Pull upper B-pillar trim -1- out of body mounting -arrow C-. To
do this, swing trim towards inside and simultaneously pull it off
downwards.
– Thread out belt webbing with latch plate through slider for belt
height adjuster and remove upper B-pillar trim.

Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in B-pillar trims for installa‐
tion.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the B-pillar trims are posi‐

Torque setting
♦ ⇒ “5.4 Assembly overview - B-pillar trim”, page 212
5.14.2 Removing and installing lower B-pillar

trim
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left vehicle side. Follow same instructions for the right side as
appropriate.

– Release sill panel moulding -3- in area of overlap to lower B-

pillar trim -1- ⇒ page 222 .
– Release upper B-pillar trim in area of overlap to lower B-pillar
trim -1- ⇒ page 233 .
– Release lower B-pillar trim -1- from door seal beading.
– Using wedge - T10383- , release lower B-pillar trim -1- in area
of retaining clips -2- from body mountings.
– If fitted, disconnect connector on button for deactivating inte‐
rior monitoring and vehicle inclination sensor - E616- and
remove lower B-pillar trim -1-.

Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in B-pillar trims for installa‐
tion.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the B-pillar trims are posi‐

Torque setting
♦ ⇒ “5.4 Assembly overview - B-pillar trim”, page 212
5.15 Removing and installing C-pillar trim

⇒ “5.15.1 Removing and installing C-pillar trim, Saloon”,
page 237
⇒ “5.15.2 Removing and installing C-pillar trim, Estate”,
page 239
5.15.1 Removing and installing C-pillar trim,

Saloon
Note



Removing

in C-pillar trim -1- from body mountings.
– Unclip C-pillar trim -1- in area of retaining clips -3- from body
mountings using removal lever - 80 - 200- .

– Move C-pillar trim -1- towards rear -arrow A-, and lift it out of
clips -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in C-pillar trim for installation.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the C-pillar trim is positioned
in door seal beading.
5.15.2 Removing and installing C-pillar trim,

Estate
Note


Removing
– Only release luggage compartment side trim in area of C-pillar,
D-pillar and rear side window. Do not remove it completely.

– Release lower clip -5- using release pliers - VAS 6427- .

– Starting at lower edge of trim, pull off trim -1- to release clip
-4- from body and from lower flange clip -2-.
– Pull C-pillar trim -1- downwards -arrow b- until clip -3- is posi‐
tioned in wider section of recess.
– Remove C-pillar trim -1- towards inside -arrow a-.
If the retaining clip -4- remains in the mounting in the body after
the trim has been removed, use the removal tool - T40280- to
remove the clip.
Before installing, insert the retaining clip into the C-pillar trim.
Note
Before installing, replace clip -3- by a new part.
Installing
– Insert trim in vehicle, and clip it to body.

Note
Following installation, make sure that the C-pillar trim is posi‐

tioned in the beading of the door seal and in the two flange clips
in the area of the side window.
5.16 Removing and installing D-pillar trim
Note


Removing
– Remove roof end strip ⇒ page 284 .
– Release D-pillar trim -1- in area of retaining clips -2- from body
mountings using removal lever - 80 - 200- .
– Release D-pillar trim -1- from luggage compartment side trim.
– Unclip D-pillar trim from retaining clips -3-.
– Pull D-pillar trim -1- downwards out of moulded headliner
-arrow-, and remove it.
Installing
Note

necessary.
♦ Remove any retaining clips -2- left in body mountings using
removal tool - T40280- and fit them in D-pillar trim for instal‐
lation.
♦ Following installation, ensure that the D-pillar trim is positioned
in rear lid seal beading.

5.17 Removing and installing wheel housing

trims
Note
♦ Removal and installation is described for the left vehicle side.

♦ Removal and installation are identical for Saloon and Estate.

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
Vehicles with side airbag
WARNING

⇒ page 3 .
– Disconnect battery ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery;

Disconnecting and connecting battery .

– Remove clamping washer or nut -3-.

– Release sill panel trim in area of transition to wheel housing
trim -1- from body and from retaining clips -4- of wheel housing
trim -1- ⇒ page 222 .
– Carefully push wheel housing trim -1- in area of centre side
airbag outwards and towards rear in order to detach guide lug
from body at side.
– Release wheel housing trim -1- in area of retaining clips -2-
from body mountings using wedge - T10383- .
– Disconnect electrical wire for side airbag from wheel housing
trim -1-.
Installing
– Switch on ignition.

WARNING
Ensure that nobody is in vehicle.
– Connect vehicle battery ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ;

Battery; Disconnecting and connecting battery .
Note

5.18 Removing and installing foot rest

⇒ “5.18.1 Removing and installing foot rest, LHD vehicles”, page
244
⇒ “5.18.2 Removing and installing foot rest, RHD vehicles”, page
245
5.18.1 Removing and installing foot rest, LHD

vehicles
Removing
– Remove lower A-pillar trim on driver side ⇒ page 224 .

– Push foot rest -2- towards centre of vehicle out of 3 mountings

in bracket located underneath -arrows-.
– Release two locking tabs -1- with removal wedge - 3409- to‐
wards centre of vehicle.
– Swivel foot rest -2- upwards out of fasteners -1- and remove.

– Lift bracket -1- off studs and pull it out from beneath floor cov‐
ering.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.8.1 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, LHD
5.18.2 Removing and installing foot rest, RHD

vehicles

Removing
– Press foot rest -2- upwards in -direction of arrow- and remove
it.

– Lift bracket -1- off studs and remove it.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.8.2 Assembly overview - foot rest and floor covering, RHD
5.19 Removing and installing floor covering

Removing
– Remove front seats ⇒ page 327 .
– Remove sill panel mouldings ⇒ page 222 .
– Remove lower A-pillar trims ⇒ page 224 .
– Remove front belt end fittings ⇒ page 96 .
– Remove foot rest ⇒ page 244 .
– If fitted, remove rear air duct ⇒ Heating, air conditioning; Rep.
gr. 87 ; Air duct; Assembly overview - air duct and air distri‐
bution in passenger compartment .

– Remove floor mats -1- and -2-.

– Lift floor covering -3- at rear and pull it towards rear.
Caution
Ensure that the floor covering is not torn in the area of the cut-
outs.
– Fold floor covering together and remove it through front door.

Installing
5.20 Removing and installing rear shelf

⇒ “5.20.1 Removing and installing rear shelf, without sun blind for
rear window”, page 247
⇒ “5.20.2 Removing and installing rear shelf, with sun blind for
rear window”, page 248
5.20.1 Removing and installing rear shelf, with‐

out sun blind for rear window
Removing
– Fold down rear seat backrests.


– First, unclip rear shelf -1- upwards -arrow A-, then pull it out of
retainers in direction of travel -arrows B-.
– Guide seat belt on right and left out of rear shelf -1-.
– Remove rear shelf -1- from vehicle.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in rear shelf support for
installation.
5.20.2 Removing and installing rear shelf, with

sun blind for rear window

Removing
Note
The sun blind is removed in rolled-up position.

– Remove C-pillar trim ⇒ page 237 .


– Unclip rear shelf at front -1- upwards first -arrows A-, then pull
it out of retainers at rear in direction of travel -arrows B-.
– Guide seat belt on right and left out of front section of rear shelf
-1-.
– Remove front section of rear shelf -1- from vehicle.


– Lift rear section of rear shelf -1- upwards first, then pull it out
of retainers at rear in direction of travel.
– Disconnect connector from rear roller blind control unit -
J262- .
– Remove rear section of rear shelf -1- from vehicle.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in rear shelf support for
installation.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.9.2 Assembly overview - rear shelf, with sun blind for rear
window”, page 221

5.21 Removing and installing sun blind for

rear window
Removing
– Remove rear shelf with sun blind for rear window
⇒ page 248 .
– Detach sun blind -2- from rear shelf -1-.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “5.10 Assembly overview - sun blind for rear window”, page
222
5.22 Removing and installing rear roller blind

motor -V91-

Removing
⇒ page 248 .
– Remove sun blind for rear window ⇒ page 252 .
– Detach connector -2- and cable tie on motor -1-.
– Unscrew bolts for motor -4-.
– Pull motor -1- in direction of arrow off sun blind -3-.
Installing
Note
Attach wiring harness to sun blind motor using cable ties.
Torque settings
222
5.23 Removing and installing rear roller blind

control unit -J262-
Removing
⇒ page 248 .
– Disconnect connector -2- from control unit -1-.
– Press retaining lug -4- and at the same time pull control unit
-1- in direction of arrow out of bracket -3-.
Installing
Torque settings
222

6 Luggage compartment trims

⇒ “6.1 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment trims”,
page 254
⇒ “6.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim”,
page 257
⇒ “6.3 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor”,
page 259
⇒ “6.4 Assembly overview - upper rear lid trim”, page 262
⇒ “6.5 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim”, page 263
⇒ “6.6 Removing and installing luggage compartment cover”,
page 264
⇒ “6.7 Removing and installing lock carrier trim”, page 265
⇒ “6.8 Removing and installing fastening rings”, page 266
⇒ “6.9 Removing and installing support for luggage compartment
floor”, page 267
⇒ “6.10 Removing and installing luggage compartment side trim”,
page 272
⇒ “6.11 Removing and installing upper rear lid trim”, page 276
⇒ “6.12 Removing and installing lower rear lid trim”, page 278
6.1 Overview of fitting locations - luggage

compartment trims
⇒ “6.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment
trims, Saloon”, page 254
⇒ “6.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment
trims, Estate”, page 256
6.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment trims, Saloon

1 - Lower rear lid trim

⇒ page 263 .
⇒ page 278
2 - Luggage compartment side
trim
⇒ page 257 .
⇒ page 272
3 - Luggage compartment floor
⇒ page 259 .
4 - Lock carrier trim
⇒ page 265
6. Luggage compartment trims 255

6.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - luggage compartment trims, Estate

⇒ page 264 .
⇒ page 280
2 - Upper rear lid trim
⇒ page 262 .
⇒ page 276
3 - Luggage compartment cov‐
er
⇒ page 264
trim
⇒ page 258 .
⇒ page 274
⇒ page 259 .
6 - Lining for spare wheel well
⇒ page 259 .
7 - Lock carrier trim
⇒ page 265

6.2 Assembly overview - luggage compart‐

ment side trim
⇒ “6.2.1 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim,
Saloon”, page 257
⇒ “6.2.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim,
Estate”, page 258
6.2.1 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim, Saloon
Note
The illustration shows the luggage compartment side trim on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror
image of left-hand side).
1 - Hinge trim
trim
⇒ page 272
3 - Fastening ring
⇒ page 266
4 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Clip
❑ Qty. 2
or deformed.
6 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm

6.2.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim, Estate
Note
The illustration shows the luggage compartment side trim on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror

trim
⇒ page 274
2 - Clip
or deformed.
3 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
4 - Bag hook
5 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
6 - Operating handle for re‐
mote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest
⇒ page 392
7 - Fastening ring
⇒ page 266
8 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
9 - Fastening ring
⇒ page 266
10 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm

6.3 Assembly overview - luggage compart‐

ment floor
⇒ “6.3.1 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Sa‐
loon”, page 259
⇒ “6.3.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Estate
without rail system”, page 260
⇒ “6.3.3 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Estate
with rail system”, page 261
6.3.1 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Saloon

parts catalogue
❑ Remove from vehicle to‐
wards rear

6.3.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Estate without rail system
1 - Cross member trim

❑ Unclip upwards from
body panel
covering bracket
⇒ page 267
3 - Cap
❑ Qty. 2
4 - Transversal partition ele‐
ment
❑ Removing
– Remove transversal
partition element up‐
wards.
5 - Longitudinal partition ele‐

ment
❑ Removing
– Remove longitudinal
partition element up‐
wards.

7 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 6 Nm
parts catalogue
❑ Remove from vehicle to‐
wards rear

6.3.3 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Estate with rail system
1 - Front bracket
⇒ page 269
2 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 8 Nm
3 - Retaining rail
⇒ page 269
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 8 Nm
6 - Clamping nut
❑ Qty. 2
covering bracket
⇒ page 269
8 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 6 Nm
10 - Retainer at rear
⇒ page 269

6.4 Assembly overview - upper rear lid trim
1 - Rear lid
❑ Assembly overview -
lower rear lid trim
⇒ page 264
lower rear lid trim
⇒ page 280
2 - Upper rear lid trim
⇒ page 276
3 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 9
T40280- .
deformed retaining
clips.

6.5 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim

⇒ “6.5.1 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Saloon”,
page 263
⇒ “6.5.2 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Estate”,
page 264
6.5.1 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Saloon
1 - Rear lid
2 - Lock cover
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Support
❑ For warning triangle
⇒ page 278

6.5.2 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Estate
1 - Rear lid
upper rear lid trim
⇒ page 262
upper rear lid trim
⇒ page 276
⇒ page 280
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Lock cover
5 - Lever trim
6 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 1.5 Nm
6.6 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment cover
Note
If the side securing hooks are damaged there is no need to renew

the luggage compartment cover. In this case, the defective se‐
curing hook should be removed by workshop means and replaced
with a new part. For “allocation” see ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue .

Removing
– Open luggage compartment cover -1- completely.
– Push luggage compartment cover -1- in
-direction of arrow A-.
– At the same time, lift luggage compartment cover -1- upwards
out of right luggage compartment side trim -arrow B-.
– Pull luggage compartment cover -1- out of left luggage com‐
partment side trim, and remove it.
Installing
6.7 Removing and installing lock carrier trim

Removing
– Remove luggage compartment floor towards rear.
– Detach lock carrier trim -1- from rear lid seal beading -2-.
– Release lock carrier trim -1- in area of retaining clips from body
mountings -arrows- using removal lever - 80 - 200- .
– Remove lock carrier trim -1- upwards.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in lock carrier trim for
installation.
– Engage lock carrier trim -1- in mountings in body.

– Fit lock carrier trim -1- to beading of rear lid seal.

6.8 Removing and installing fastening rings

⇒ “6.8.1 Removing and installing fastening ring, fastening ring
with one securing bolt”, page 266
⇒ “6.8.2 Removing and installing fastening ring, fastening ring
with two securing bolts”, page 266
6.8.1 Removing and installing fastening ring,

fastening ring with one securing bolt
Note


Removing
– Fold down bar -4- and unclip cover -1- using a screwdriver.
– Unscrew bolt -3- and remove fastening ring -2-.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim”,
page 257
6.8.2 Removing and installing fastening ring,

fastening ring with two securing bolts
Note


Removing
– Fold down bar -4- and unclip cover -1- using a screwdriver.
– Unscrew bolts -3-, and remove fastening ring -2-.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim”,
page 257
6.9 Removing and installing support for lug‐

gage compartment floor
⇒ “6.9.1 Removing and installing support for luggage compart‐
ment floor, vehicles without rail system”, page 267
⇒ “6.9.2 Removing and installing support for luggage compart‐
ment floor covering, vehicles with rail system”, page 269
6.9.1 Removing and installing support for lug‐

gage compartment floor, vehicles with‐
out rail system
Note



Removing
– Remove luggage compartment cover ⇒ page 264 .
– Remove luggage compartment floor from vehicle towards
rear.
– If fitted, unclip caps -2-.

– Unscrew bolts -arrows-.
– Detach support for luggage compartment floor covering -1-,
and remove it towards rear.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.3.2 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Es‐
tate without rail system”, page 260

6.9.2 Removing and installing support for lug‐

gage compartment floor covering, vehi‐
cles with rail system
Note


Removing
rear.


– Remove retaining rail -1- upwards.


– Lift support for luggage compartment floor covering -1-, and
remove it sideways.
– Check clamping nuts -2- for damage, and renew them if nec‐
essary.
– Remove rear bracket -1-.


– Remove front bracket -1-.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.3.3 Assembly overview - luggage compartment floor, Es‐
tate with rail system”, page 261
6.10 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment side trim
⇒ “6.10.1 Removing and installing luggage compartment side
trim, Saloon”, page 272
⇒ “6.10.2 Removing and installing luggage compartment side
trim, Estate”, page 274
6.10.1 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment side trim, Saloon
Note


Removing
– Remove lock carrier trim ⇒ page 265 .

– Remove fastening ring -3- ⇒ page 266 .

– Remove clip -4- and -6-.
– Release luggage compartment side trim -2- and remove hinge
trim -1-.
– If present, disconnect connectors, and remove luggage com‐
partment side trim -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- , and fit them in luggage compartment
side trim for installation.
♦ Following installation, ensure that luggage compartment side
trim is positioned in rear lid seal beading.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.2.1 Assembly overview - luggage compartment side trim,
Saloon”, page 257
6.10.2 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment side trim, Estate
Note


Removing
rear.
– Remove lock carrier trim ⇒ page 265 .
– Remove bracket for luggage compartment floor covering
⇒ page 267 .

– Unscrew two bolts -8- and two bolts -9-.

– Remove fastening rings -7- and -10-.
– Fold down bag hook -4-, and unscrew bolt -5-.
– Pull and hold operating lever to remotely release rear seat
backrest -3-.
– Release luggage compartment side trim -1- in area of retaining
clips -11- from body mountings using removal lever - 80 - 200- .
– If present, disconnect connectors, and remove luggage com‐
partment side trim -1-.

Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- , and fit them in luggage compartment
side trim for installation.
♦ Following installation, ensure that luggage compartment side
trim is positioned in rear lid seal beading.

Torque settings
Estate”, page 258
6.11 Removing and installing upper rear lid

trim
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Remove lower rear lid trim, Estate ⇒ page 280 .
– Using wedge - T10383- , release upper rear lid trim -2- from
mountings in rear lid -1-, working from centre outwards.
– Remove upper rear lid trim -2-.

Installing
Note

necessary.
♦ Remove any retaining clips left in mountings in rear lid using
removal tool - T40280- , and fit them in upper rear lid trim for
installation.

6.12 Removing and installing lower rear lid

trim
⇒ “6.12.1 Removing and installing lower rear lid trim, Saloon”,
page 278
⇒ “6.12.2 Removing and installing lower rear lid trim, Estate”,
page 280
6.12.1 Removing and installing lower rear lid

trim, Saloon
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Remove warning triangle.


– Separate connecting element -4- -arrows-.
– Using wedges - T10383- , release trim -2- from mountings in
rear lid -1- in area of retaining clips.
– Check if all retaining clips -4- are inserted in trim -2-.
– Unclip any retaining clips left in rear lid -1- using removal tool
- T40280- .
– Fit those retaining clips back in trim -2-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.5.1 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Saloon”, page
263

6.12.2 Removing and installing lower rear lid

trim, Estate
Removing
– Remove warning triangle.

– Remove mounting for warning triangle.

– Unclip trim -4- from handle.
– Open service flaps at sides of trim -1-.
– Grasp in service holes in trim.
– With a »firm jerk«, release trim -1- from mountings in rear lid.
– Check if all retaining clips are inserted in trim -1-.
– Unclip any retaining clips left in rear lid using removal tool -
T40280- .
– Fit those retaining clips back in trim -1-.
Installing
Note

necessary.

Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “6.5.2 Assembly overview - lower rear lid trim, Estate”, page
264

7 Roof trims
⇒ “7.1 Assembly overview - moulded headliner”, page 282
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing roof end strip”, page 284
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing moulded headlining”, page 284
⇒ “7.4 Installing roof reinforcement to body”, page 290
7.1 Assembly overview - moulded headliner

⇒ “7.1.1 Assembly overview - moulded headliner, Saloon”,
page 282
⇒ “7.1.2 Assembly overview - moulded headliner, Estate”,
page 283
7.1.1 Assembly overview - moulded headliner, Saloon
parts catalogue
❑ For some vehicle equip‐
ment versions cut-outs
must be cut into new
moulded headliner
⇒ page 287 .
⇒ page 284
Caution
The
♦ moulded headliner is
easily kinked.
If♦kinked, the headliner
must be renewed.
2 - Roof reinforcement
❑ Not installed if a sunroof
is fitted.
❑ Install to body
⇒ page 290 .
❑ Only installed if a sun‐
roof is fitted.
❑ Install to body
⇒ page 293 .
4 - Retaining clip
roof is fitted.
❑ Qty. 15
❑ Insert in moulded head‐
liner.
❑ Remove remaining retaining clips in fastening strip.
❑ Renew any damaged or deformed retaining clips.
5 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 4

7.1.2 Assembly overview - moulded headliner, Estate
parts catalogue
❑ For some vehicle equip‐
ment versions cut-outs
must be cut into new
moulded headliner
⇒ page 290 .
⇒ page 287
Caution
The
♦ moulded headliner is
easily kinked.
If♦kinked, the headliner
must be renewed.
is fitted.
❑ Install to body
⇒ page 294 .
is fitted.
❑ Install to body
⇒ page 294 .
roof is fitted.
❑ Install to body
⇒ page 297 .
5 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 9
❑ Remove any retaining clips left in body mountings using removal tool -T40280- .
6 - Roof end strip
7 - Retaining clip
❑ Only installed if a sunroof is fitted.
❑ Qty. 23
❑ Insert in moulded headliner.
❑ Remove remaining retaining clips in fastening strip.
8 - Retaining clip
❑ Qty. 4
7. Roof trims 283

7.2 Removing and installing roof end strip

♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Release roof end strip -1- in area of retaining clips from body
mountings using wedge - T10383- .
– Remove roof end strip -1- downwards.
Installing
Note

necessary.
moval tool - T40280- and fit them in roof end strip for installa‐
tion.
♦ Following installation, ensure that roof end strip is positioned
in rear lid seal beading.
7.3 Removing and installing moulded head‐

lining
⇒ “7.3.1 Removing and installing moulded headliner, Saloon”,
page 284
⇒ “7.3.2 Removing and installing moulded headliner, estate”,
page 287
7.3.1 Removing and installing moulded head‐

liner, Saloon

♦ Wedges - T10383-
7. Roof trims 285

Removing

• Steering wheel in lowest position
• Driver seat in foremost position, backrest pushed back as far
as it can go
• Selector lever in “neutral” position
• Rear seat backrest folded forwards by 60%
– Only loosen roof grab handles from mountings in bracket for
roof grab handles. Do not remove them completely
⇒ page 38 .
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ page 327 .
Caution

Note


ings.

er -1- in position.
– Release retaining clips -2- at rear end of moulded headliner
-1- using wedges - T10383- .
– With assistance of two additional mechanics, carefully remove
moulded headliner through rear right door aperture.
Installing
Cutting new cut-outs into a new moulded headliner
On vehicles with illuminated “vanity mirrors” and/or rain and light
sensor - G397- , the respective cut-outs must be made in a new
moulded headliner.
Caution
On vehicles with illuminated “vanity mirrors” with “LED light‐

ing”, the position and size of the cut-outs must be transferred
from the old part.
– Cut the required cut-outs into the new moulded headliner us‐
ing a cutter knife. The moulded headliner is provided with the
respective markings.
Note

necessary.
♦ Always renew damaged retaining clips for sliding sunroof trim
frame (qty. 15).
7.3.2 Removing and installing moulded head‐

liner, estate
7. Roof trims 287

♦ Wedges - T10383-

Removing

– Remove D-pillar trims ⇒ page 241 .
– If fitted, unscrew bolts for eyelets for net partition. Do not re‐
move eyelets for net partition ⇒ page 34 .
– Remove roof grab handle ⇒ page 38 .
– Move front backrest to 45°-position.
Caution

Note
7. Roof trims 289


ings.
er -1- in position.
– With the aid of a second mechanic, carefully pull out moulded
headliner -1- towards rear from below A-pillar trims.
– With aid of second mechanic, carefully guide out moulded
headliner -1- through rear lid aperture, turning it as necessary
while doing so.
Installing
Cutting new cut-outs into a new moulded headliner
On vehicles with illuminated “vanity mirrors” and/or rain and light
sensor - G397- , the respective cut-outs must be made in a new
moulded headliner.
Caution
On vehicles with illuminated “vanity mirrors” with “LED light‐

ing”, the position and size of the cut-outs must be transferred
from the old part.
– Cut the required cut-outs into the new moulded headliner us‐
ing a cutter knife. The moulded headliner is provided with the
respective markings.
Note

necessary.
♦ Always renew damaged retaining clips for sliding sunroof trim
frame (qty. 15).
7.4 Installing roof reinforcement to body

⇒ “7.4.1 Mounting roof reinforcement on body, saloon without
sliding sunroof”, page 290
⇒ “7.4.2 Installing roof reinforcement to body, Saloon with sliding
sunroof”, page 293
⇒ “7.4.3 Installing roof reinforcement to body, Estate without slid‐
ing sunroof”, page 294
⇒ “7.4.4 Installing roof reinforcement to body, Estate with sliding
sunroof”, page 297
7.4.1 Mounting roof reinforcement on body,

saloon without sliding sunroof

♦ Electric cutter - V.A.G 1561A-
♦ Scraping blade - V.A.G 1561/20-
♦ Hand-cartridge gun - V.A.G 1628-
♦ Release lever - T10039 -
7. Roof trims 291

Removing
– Using a carpet knife, cut roof reinforcement -1- into approx.
6 cm wide strips -2- -dot-dash lines-.
– Pull strips -2- off roof.
– Cut back adhesive residue using electric cutter - V.A.G 1561A-
and scraper - V.A.G 1561/20- .
Note
If the paintwork structure has been damaged in the process of

removal of the roof reinforcement, repair paintwork damage ac‐
cording to the guidelines of the ⇒ Paintwork manual .
Installing
Note
Observe processing instructions for the adhesive when installing

the roof reinforcement.
– Using hand-cartridge gun - V.A.G 1628- , apply 1-pack as‐

sembly adhesive (⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue ) to roof
reinforcement according to the following dimensions:
– Measure width of roof reinforcements, and mark centre from

both sides.
– Bead diameter approx. 6 mm
♦ Dimension -a- = 35 mm
♦ Dimension -b- = 35 mm
♦ Dimension -c- = 58 mm
– Guide roof reinforcement -1- into vehicle.

– Position roof reinforcement -1- according to dimension -a-
centrally on roof, and press it on across entire surface.
Dimension -a-: 43 mm from rear sheet-metal edge on front roof
cross member
If roof reinforcement -1- has been installed correctly, dimensions
-b- and -c- are set automatically.
Dimension -b-: 66 ± 3 mm from rear swage line in front roof cross
member
Dimension -c-: 43 mm from front sheet-metal edge on rear roof
cross member

7.4.2 Installing roof reinforcement to body,

Saloon with sliding sunroof
7. Roof trims 293

Removing
Note

Installing
Note
♦ Observe processing instructions for the adhesive when instal‐

ling the roof reinforcement.
♦ Do not apply any adhesive within the radius of the “half-moon-
shaped” recess!
– Using hand-cartridge gun - V.A.G 1628- , apply 1-pack as‐

sembly adhesive (⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue ) to roof
reinforcement according to the following dimensions:
– Measure width of roof reinforcements and mark centre of both

sides.

Dimension -a-: 43 mm from front sheet-metal edge on rear cross
member
If the roof reinforcement -1- has been installed correctly, dimen‐
sion -b- is set automatically.
Dimension -b-: 66 ± 3 mm from front swage line in rear roof cross
member

Estate without sliding sunroof

7. Roof trims 295

Removing
– Cut roof reinforcements -1- and -2- into approx. 6 cm wide
strips -3- -dot-dash lines-, using a cutter knife.
Note
If the paint structure has been damaged on removal of roof rein‐

forcements, repair paint damage according to guidelines of ⇒
Paint workshop manual .
Installing
Note
♦ Observe adhesive processing instructions when installing the

roof reinforcement.
shaped” recess!
– Use hand-cartridge gun - V.A.G 1628- to apply single-compo‐

nent assembly adhesive (⇒ Electronic parts catalogue ) to roof
reinforcements. Observe the following dimensions while doing
so.


– Measure roof reinforcements -1- and -2- to width and mark

centre of both sides.
Dimension -a-: 43 mm from rear sheet-metal edge on front roof
cross member
If roof reinforcement -1- has been installed correctly, dimension
-c- is set automatically.
Dimension -c-: 66 ± 3 mm from rear swage line in front roof cross
member
– Position roof reinforcement -2- according to -dimension b-
centrally on roof and press it on across entire surface.
Dimension -b-: 10 ± 1 mm distance between front roof reinforce‐
ment -1- and rear roof reinforcement -2-

Estate with sliding sunroof
7. Roof trims 297

Removing
Note

Installing
Note
♦ Observe processing instructions for the adhesive when instal‐

ling the roof reinforcement.
shaped” recess!
– Use hand-cartridge gun - V.A.G 1628- to apply single-compo‐

nent assembly adhesive (⇒ Electronic parts catalogue ) to roof
reinforcements. Observe the following dimensions while doing
so.

– Measure width of roof reinforcements and mark centre of both

sides.

Dimension -a-: 40 mm from front sheet-metal edge.
If the roof reinforcement -1- has been installed correctly, dimen‐
sion -b- is set automatically.
Dimension -b-: 42 ± 3 mm from rear sheet-metal edge.
7. Roof trims 299

72 – Seat frames
1 Overview of seat variants
⇒ “1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat variants”, page 300
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - seat variants
1 - Driver seat
❑ Configuration depends
on vehicle equipment.
front seat ⇒ page 308
front backrest
⇒ page 312
seat pan ⇒ page 317
2 - Front passenger seat
front seat ⇒ page 308
front backrest
⇒ page 312
rear seat backrest
⇒ page 373
4 - Side padding
side padding
⇒ page 375 .
5 - Bench seat / individual
seats
❑ Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats ⇒ page 370
300 Rep. gr.72 - Seat frames

2. Front seats 301

2 Front seats
⇒ “2.1 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic com‐
ponents”, page 303
⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - front seat”, page 308
⇒ “2.3 Assembly overview - front backrest”, page 312
⇒ “2.4 Assembly overview - seat pan”, page 317
⇒ “2.5 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment”, page 322
⇒ “2.6 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment”, page 324
⇒ “2.7 Assembly overview - seat depth adjustment”, page 326
⇒ “2.8 Assembly overview - fire extinguisher”, page 327
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing front seat”, page 327
⇒ “2.10 Removing front seat if seat longitudinal adjustment motor
V28 / V31 is defective”, page 331
⇒ “2.11 Connecting and disconnecting airbag adapter”,
page 334
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing seat trim on tunnel side”,
page 335
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing seat trim on sill side”,
page 337
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing bracket for seat trim”,
page 341
⇒ “2.15 Removing and installing front backrest”, page 343
⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing manually adjustable lumbar sup‐
port frame”, page 345
⇒ “2.17 Removing and installing seat depth adjustment unit”,
page 347
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing seat rake adjustment unit”, page
350
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing handle for seat height adjust‐
ment”, page 353
⇒ “2.20 Removing and installing seat height adjustment unit”,
page 353
⇒ “2.21 Removing and installing lower seat pan frame with seat
longitudinal adjustment motor V28 / V31 ”, page 357
⇒ “2.22 Removing and installing backrest adjustment unit”, page
358
⇒ “2.23 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment unit”,
page 362
⇒ “2.24 Removing and installing head restraint”, page 363
⇒ “2.25 Removing and installing head restraint guide”,
page 364
⇒ “2.26 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment
switch E176 / E177 ”, page 365
⇒ “2.27 Removing and installing lumbar support adjustment motor
V125 / V126 / V129 / V130 ”, page 365
⇒ “2.28 Removing and installing seat adjustment operating unit
E470 / E471 ”, page 366

⇒ “2.29 Removing and installing massage control unit J740 ”,

page 367
⇒ “2.30 Removing and installing seat and steering column ad‐
justment control unit with memory J136 ”, page 368
⇒ “2.31 Removing and installing impact and stabbing protector in
backrest”, page 368
2.1 Overview of fitting locations - electrical

and electronic components
⇒ “2.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic
components, standard seat, ergoActive seat”, page 303
components, electrically adjustable seat”, page 304
components, electrically adjustable seat with seat ventilation”,
page 306
2.1.1 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic components, stand‐

ard seat, ergoActive seat
1 - Massage control unit -

J740-
⇒ page 367
❑ Depending on equip‐
ment
2 - Seat heating element
❑ Heated seat cushion for
driver seat - Z6-
❑ Heated seat cushion for
front passenger seat -
Z8-
ment
⇒ page 418
3 - Backrest heating element
❑ Heated backrest for
driver seat - Z7-
❑ Heated backrest for
Z9-
ment
⇒ page 419
4 - Lumbar support
❑ Driver seat lumbar sup‐
port longitudinal adjust‐
ment motor - V125-
port height adjustment
motor - V129-
❑ Front passenger seat
lumbar support longitudinal adjustment motor - V126-
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support height adjustment motor - V130-
2. Front seats 303

5 - Massage function button
❑ Driver seat massage function button - E670-
❑ Front passenger seat massage function button - E671-
❑ Depending on equipment
❑ To remove, carefully lever out of seat trim using removal wedge - 3409- .
6 - Lumbar support adjustment switch
❑ Driver seat lumbar support adjustment switch - E176-
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support adjustment switch - E177-
❑ Removing and installing lumbar support ⇒ page 365 .
2.1.2 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic components, electri‐

cally adjustable seat
1 - Lumbar support
ment motor - V125-
motor - V129-
lumbar support longitu‐
dinal adjustment motor -
V126-
lumbar support height
adjustment motor -
V130-
⇒ page 316 .
⇒ page 365
2 - Seat height adjuster
❑ Driver seat height ad‐
justment motor - V138-
height adjustment motor
- V246-
⇒ page 323 .
⇒ page 355
3 - Seat adjustment operating
unit
❑ Driver seat adjustment
operating unit - E470-
adjustment operating
unit - E471-

6 - Seat rake adjustment
❑ Driver seat rake adjustment motor - V243-
❑ Front passenger seat rake adjustment motor - V244-
7 - Control unit
❑ Massage control unit - J740-
❑ Seat and steering column adjustment control unit with memory - J136-
❑ Removing and installing massage control unit - J740- ⇒ page 367
❑ Removing and installing seat and steering column adjustment control unit with memory - J136-
⇒ page 368
8 - Seat longitudinal adjuster
❑ Driver seat longitudinal adjustment motor - V28-
❑ Front passenger seat longitudinal adjustment motor - V31-
❑ Heated seat cushion for driver seat - Z6-
❑ Heated seat cushion for front passenger seat - Z8-
10 - Backrest adjuster
❑ Driver seat backrest adjustment motor - V45-
❑ Front passenger seat backrest adjustment motor - V46-
❑ Heated backrest for driver seat - Z7-
❑ Heated backrest for front passenger seat - Z9-
2. Front seats 305

2.1.3 Overview of fitting locations - electrical and electronic components, electri‐

cally adjustable seat with seat ventilation
1 - Lumbar support
ment motor - V125-
motor - V129-
lumbar support longitu‐
dinal adjustment motor -
V126-
lumbar support height
adjustment motor -
V130-
⇒ page 316 .
⇒ page 365
- V246-
⇒ page 323 .
⇒ page 355
unit
unit - E471-
❑ Driver seat rake adjustment motor - V243-
❑ Front passenger seat rake adjustment motor - V244-

7 - Seat cushion fan
❑ Front left seat cushion fan 1 - V514-
❑ Front right seat cushion fan 1 - V518-
8 - Control unit
❑ Massage control unit - J740-
❑ Seat and steering column adjustment control unit with memory - J136-
❑ Removing and installing massage control unit - J740- ⇒ page 367
❑ Removing and installing seat and steering column adjustment control unit with memory - J136-
⇒ page 368
9 - Seat longitudinal adjuster
❑ Heated seat cushion for driver seat - Z6-
❑ Heated seat cushion for front passenger seat - Z8-
11 - Backrest adjuster
❑ Driver seat backrest adjustment motor - V45-
❑ Front passenger seat backrest adjustment motor - V46-
❑ Heated backrest for driver seat - Z7-
❑ Heated backrest for front passenger seat - Z9-
13 - Backrest fan
❑ Front left seat backrest fan 1 - V512-
❑ Front right seat backrest fan 1 - V516-
2. Front seats 307

2.2 Assembly overview - front seat

⇒ “2.2.1 Assembly overview - front seat, standard seat, ergoAc‐
tive seat”, page 308
⇒ “2.2.2 Assembly overview - front seat, electrically adjustable
seat”, page 310
2.2.1 Assembly overview - front seat, standard seat, ergoActive seat
Note
♦ The illustration shows the driver seat. The front passenger seat is similar (mirror image of driver seat).
♦ The illustration shows the front seat for LHD vehicles. The front seat for RHD vehicles is similar (mirror image
of front seat for LHD vehicles).
1 - Backrest
⇒ page 312 .
⇒ page 343
2 - Head restraint
⇒ page 363
3 - Hand wheel
❑ For manual backrest ad‐
justment
❑ On vehicles with front
passenger seat with
through-loading func‐
tion, the adjustment and
release lever is fitted in‐
stead of the adjustment
knob.
ment
⇒ page 358
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 40 Nm
⇒ page 322 .
⇒ page 353
handle for seat height
adjustment
⇒ page 353 .
6 - Seat trim on sill side

9 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on sill side.
❑ Installed at front and rear.
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Detach from seat rail and pull off; to do so, use a screwdriver to carefully release locking lugs without
breaking them off
❑ Carefully slide onto seat rail until it engages audibly.
11 - Storage compartment
❑ Not fitted in this model
12 - Seat longitudinal adjustment handle
❑ Pull off by hand or separate from handle mounting using rubber-headed or plastic hammer.
❑ Drive onto handle mounting as far as stop using a rubber hammer, taking care not to damage surface
13 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on tunnel side.
❑ Qty. 2
breaking them off
14 - Seat pan
❑ Depending on vehicle equipment, with seat depth adjustment ⇒ page 326 .
15 - Belt buckle
16 - Seat trim on tunnel side
2. Front seats 309

2.2.2 Assembly overview - front seat, electrically adjustable seat
Note
♦ The illustration shows the driver seat. The front passenger seat is similar (mirror image of driver seat).
♦ The illustration shows the front seat for LHD vehicles. The front seat for RHD vehicles is similar (mirror image
of front seat for LHD vehicles).
1 - Backrest
⇒ page 312 .
⇒ page 343
2 - Head restraint
⇒ page 363
3 - Seat trim on sill side
⇒ page 339
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 40 Nm
unit
unit - E471-
⇒ page 366
6 - Lumbar support adjustment
switch
port adjustment switch -
E176-
lumbar support adjust‐
ment switch - E177-
⇒ page 365
7 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on sill side.
❑ Qty. 2
breaking them off
8 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on tunnel side.
❑ Qty. 2

breaking them off
9 - Seat pan
10 - Belt buckle
11 - Seat trim on tunnel side
2. Front seats 311

2.3 Assembly overview - front backrest

⇒ “2.3.1 Assembly overview - front backrest, standard ergoActive
seat”, page 312
⇒ “2.3.2 Assembly overview - front backrest, electrically adjusta‐
ble seat”, page 314
⇒ “2.3.3 Assembly overview - front backrest, with seat ventilation”,
page 315
⇒ “2.3.4 Assembly overview - front backrest, electrically adjusta‐
ble lumbar support”, page 316
2.3.1 Assembly overview - front backrest, standard ergoActive seat
Note
♦ The illustration shows the driver seat backrest. The front passenger seat backrest is similar (mirror image
of driver seat backrest).
♦ The illustration shows the front seat backrest for LHD vehicles. The front seat backrest for RHD vehicles is
similar (mirror image of front seat backrest for LHD vehicles).
1 - Head restraint
⇒ page 363
❑ Must be properly engag‐
ed in head restraint
guides.
2 - Cover
❑ Qty. 2
3 - Right head restraint guide
⇒ page 364
4 - Backrest
⇒ page 343
backrest cover and pad‐
ding ⇒ page 406 .
❑ Separating backrest
cover from backrest
padding ⇒ page 414 .
❑ Depending on vehicle
equipment, with electric
lumbar support adjust‐
ment ⇒ page 316 .
5 - Left head restraint guide
⇒ page 364
6 - Lever
❑ For manual lumbar sup‐
port adjustment.
⇒ page 362
7 - Hand wheel
❑ For manual backrest adjustment

❑ On vehicles with front passenger seat with pass-through function, the adjustment and release lever is
fitted instead of the adjuster knob
8 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ Self-locking
❑ Clean threaded holes for bolts with, for example, a thread tap
❑ 34 Nm
9 - Seat pan
2. Front seats 313

2.3.2 Assembly overview - front backrest, electrically adjustable seat
Note
1 - Head restraint
⇒ page 363
guides.
2 - Cover
❑ Qty. 2
3 - Head restraint guide
❑ Qty. 2
⇒ page 364
4 - Backrest
⇒ page 343
ding ⇒ page 406 .
cover from backrest
❑ With electric lumbar
support adjustment
⇒ page 316 .
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ Self-locking
❑ Clean threaded holes
for bolts with, for exam‐
ple, a thread tap
❑ 34 Nm
6 - Seat pan

2.3.3 Assembly overview - front backrest, with seat ventilation
Note
1 - Head restraint
⇒ page 363
guides.
2 - Cover
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Qty. 2
⇒ page 364
4 - Backrest fan
❑ Front left seat backrest
fan 1 - V512-
❑ Front right seat backrest
fan 1 - V516-
5 - Backrest
⇒ page 343
ding ⇒ page 406 .
cover from backrest
❑ With electric lumbar
support adjustment
⇒ page 316 .
6 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ Self-locking
❑ 34 Nm
7 - Seat pan
2. Front seats 315

2.3.4 Assembly overview - front backrest, electrically adjustable lumbar support
1 - No replacement part
❑ Washer cast in lumbar
support.
2 - Lumbar support
❑ Driver side with driver
seat lumbar support lon‐
gitudinal adjustment
motor - V125- / driver
seat lumbar support
- V129- .
❑ Front passenger side
seat lumbar support lon‐
gitudinal adjustment
motor - V126- / front
passenger seat lumbar
support height adjust‐
ment motor - V130- .
⇒ page 365
3 - Backrest frame
4 - Rivet

2.4 Assembly overview - seat pan

⇒ “2.4.1 Assembly overview - seat pan, standard seat, ergoActive
seat”, page 317
⇒ “2.4.2 Assembly overview - seat pan, electrically adjustable
seat”, page 319
⇒ “2.4.3 Assembly overview - seat pan, with seat ventilation”,
page 320
⇒ “2.4.4 Assembly overview - seat pan, torsion rod”, page 321
2.4.1 Assembly overview - seat pan, standard seat, ergoActive seat
Note
♦ The illustration shows the driver seat pan. The front passenger seat pan is similar (mirror image of driver
seat pan).
♦ The illustration shows the seat pan for LHD vehicles. The seat pan for RHD vehicles is similar (mirror image
of seat pan for LHD vehicles).
1 - Seat padding
cover and padding on
❑ Separating seat pan
cover from seat pan
padding ⇒ page 411
2 - Seat pan
❑ Depending on vehicle
equipment, with:
♦ Seat rake adjustment
⇒ page 324 .
♦ Seat depth adjustment
⇒ page 326 .
♦ Seat height adjustment
⇒ page 322 .
❑ If using seat pan for
standard seat, sport
bars must be removed.
3 - Bracket
❑ For seat trim on sill side
⇒ page 341
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 3
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Hand wheel
❑ For manual backrest ad‐
justment
❑ On vehicles with front
passenger seat with through-loading function, the adjustment and release lever is fitted instead of the
adjustment knob.
2. Front seats 317

6 - Spreader rivet
7 - Handle
❑ For seat height adjustment ⇒ page 322 .
8 - Seat trim
❑ Sill side
❑ Configuration depends on vehicle equipment.
9 - Seat trim
❑ Tunnel side
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing seat trim on tunnel side”, page 335
10 - Bolt
❑ Renew each time it is loosened
❑ 40 Nm
11 - Belt buckle

2.4.2 Assembly overview - seat pan, electrically adjustable seat
Note
seat pan).
1 - Seat padding
cover from seat pan
2 - Seat pan
❑ If using seat pan for
standard seat, sport
bars must be removed.
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ Self-locking
ple, a thread tap
❑ 22 Nm
4 - Bracket
❑ For seat trim on sill side
⇒ page 342
5 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
6 - Spreader rivet
7 - Seat trim
❑ Sill side
⇒ page 339
8 - Lower frame of seat pan
❑ Cannot be disassembled
❑ When renewing, fit belt buckle in new lower frame
9 - Bush
❑ Inserted in all bearing points
❑ Cannot be renewed using workshop equipment
❑ If bush is damaged, renew lower seat pan frame
2. Front seats 319

10 - Seat trim
❑ Tunnel side
11 - Bolt
❑ Renew each time it is loosened
❑ 40 Nm
12 - Belt buckle
2.4.3 Assembly overview - seat pan, with seat ventilation
Note
seat pan).
1 - Seat padding
cover from seat pan
2 - Seat ventilation reinforce‐
ment
3 - Seat cushion fan
❑ Front left seat cushion
fan 1 - V514-
❑ Front right seat cushion
fan 1 - V518-
4 - Seat pan

2.4.4 Assembly overview - seat pan, torsion rod
1 - Seat pan
2 - Mountings
❑ For torsion bar
❑ Fitted into guide
3 - Torsion rod
❑ Greased; Grease ⇒
Electronic parts cata‐
logue .
2. Front seats 321

2.5 Assembly overview - seat height adjust‐

ment
⇒ “2.5.1 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, standard
seat, ergoActive seat”, page 322
⇒ “2.5.2 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, electrically
adjustable seat”, page 323
2.5.1 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, standard seat, ergoActive seat
1 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Note different length
compared to bolt
-item 8-
❑ 6.5 Nm
2 - Seat height adjustment lev‐
er
❑ For seat height adjust‐
ment
⇒ page 353
3 - Retaining clip
❑ Ensure that it is seated
securely
4 - Handle for seat height ad‐
justment
⇒ page 353
5 - Seat pan
⇒ page 317 .
6 - Lock washer
⇒ page 353
8 - Bolt
❑ Note different length
compared to bolts
-item 1-
❑ 10 Nm
9 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm

2.5.2 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, electrically adjustable seat
1 - Seat height adjustment mo‐

tor
- V246-
⇒ page 355
2 - Bolt
Caution
Left-threaded bolt
❑ Self-locking
❑ Observe notes when re‐
moving and installing
⇒ page 355
❑ Clean threaded hole for
bolt with, for example, a
thread tap.
❑ 22 Nm
3 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Self-locking
ple, a thread tap
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Self-locking
❑ 10 Nm
5 - Bracket
❑ Bolted to seat pan
2. Front seats 323

2.6 Assembly overview - seat rake adjust‐

ment
⇒ “2.6.1 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, standard
⇒ “2.6.2 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, electrically
2.6.1 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, standard seat, ergoActive seat
1 - Handle
❑ For seat rake adjust‐
ment.
⇒ page 350
2 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
⇒ page 350
4 - Seat pan
5 - Step pin
Caution
Left-threaded bolt
❑ Self-locking
step bolt with, for exam‐
ple, a thread tap.
❑ 6 Nm
6 - Bolt
❑ Self-locking
ple, a thread tap
❑ 6.5 Nm

2.6.2 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat
1 - Seat rake adjustment motor

❑ Driver seat rake adjust‐
ment motor - V243-
rake adjustment motor -
V244-
⇒ page 351
2 - Bracket
❑ Bolted to seat pan
3 - Bolt
❑ Self-locking
bolt with, for example, a
thread tap.
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Bolts
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Self-locking
ple, a thread tap
❑ 10 Nm
2. Front seats 325

2.7 Assembly overview - seat depth adjustment
1 - Nut
❑ Qty. 4
2 - Seat pan
3 - Trim
❑ For seat depth adjust‐
ment.
⇒ page 347
❑ Press in until it audibly
engages.
4 - Seat depth adjustment
⇒ page 347
5 - Bush
6 - Bolt
❑ Fit bolt with locking fluid;
locking fluid ⇒ Electron‐
ic parts catalogue .
❑ 4 Nm
7 - Bolts
❑ 4 Nm
8 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
9 - Bush

2.8 Assembly overview - fire extinguisher
1 - Bracket
❑ On seat pan
2 - Rivet
❑ Qty. 3
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
4 - Bracket
5 - Securing strap
6 - Fire extinguisher
2.9 Removing and installing front seat
Note
♦ Removal and installation is described for the left seat. Apply

the same instructions for removal and installation of the right
seat as appropriate.
♦ Removal and installation is described for a manually adjusta‐
ble seat. Apply the same instructions for removal and instal‐
lation of the an electrically adjustable seat as appropriate.
2. Front seats 327

♦ Airbag adapter - VAS 6282-
Removing
WARNING
Observe general safety regulations when working on airbag,

belt tensioner and battery isolator units (pyrotechnic compo‐
nents) ⇒ page 1 .
– Move seat to foremost position using fore and aft adjustment

mechanism.
In the event of a defective seat longitudinal adjustment motor -
V28- / -V31- it is not possible to adjust the front seat using the
seat adjustment operating unit -E470- / -E471- . In this case carry
out the appropriate procedure ⇒ page 331 .
– Move seat to rearmost position using fore and aft adjustment
mechanism.


Caution

– Tilt seat towards rear.

– Open cover in floor covering.
– Depending on vehicle equipment, release and pull wiring har‐
nesses off coupling station on seat.
– Connect airbag adapter ⇒ page 334 .
2. Front seats 329

Caution
If seat is lifted out of vehicle or transported, it must not, in order

to prevent damage, be gripped by attaching parts such as, e.g.
belt buckle, lever for seat longitudinal adjustment, lever for seat
height adjustment or seat trim panels.
– Use suitable means to protect attachments against damage.

– With your right hand, grasp between backrest and seat pad‐
ding, while with your left hand grasping the front edge of the
seat padding.
– Lift seat out of vehicle.
Installing
– Lift seat into vehicle through front door aperture.
– Put down seat on front edge first.
– Guide seat into centring pins.
WARNING
If, when installing a seat a thread in seat cross member mount‐

ing plate is damaged, reworking damaged threads is prohibi‐
ted! In this case, the seat cross member mounting plate must
be replaced.
If seat cross member mounting plate threads have been dam‐

aged:
– Renew seat cross member mounting plate concerned ⇒ Body
Repairs; Rep. gr. 51 .
– Remove airbag adapter - VAS 6282- .
– Engage side airbag wiring harness in coupling station.
– Depending on vehicle equipment, engage wiring harnesses in
coupling station.
– Close cover in floor covering.
– Connect battery ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery;
Note

WARNING
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - front seat”, page 308

2.10 Removing front seat if seat longitudinal

adjustment motor -V28- / -V31- is defec‐
tive
Checking seat longitudinal adjustment motor -V28- / -V31-
– Move front seat to highest possible position.
Note
To prevent unnecessary repair costs check seat longitudinal ad‐

justment motor -V28- / -V31- prior to removing front seat.
– Check seat longitudinal adjustment motor -V28- / -V31- ⇒ Ve‐

– Renew lower seat pan frame if seat longitudinal adjustment
motor -V28- / -V31- is defective ⇒ page 357 .
Removing if seat longitudinal adjustment motor is defective -
V28- / -V31-
Caution
♦ Do not loosen bolts -3- before seat longitudinal adjustment

motor -V28- / -V31- has been checked.
♦ Once bolts are removed, lower seat frame of seat pan
-2- including seat longitudinal adjustment motor must be
renewed.
– Unscrew bolts -3- (qty. 4) on both sides.

I - Sill-side threaded connections for seat longitudinal adjustment
motor
II - Tunnel-side threaded connections for seat longitudinal adjust‐
ment motor
Note
Access tunnel-side bolts for removal by reaching under seat from

in front.
2. Front seats 331

– Move seat to foremost position.

– Move seat to rearmost position.
– Tilt seat towards rear.
– Open cover in floor covering.
– Depending on vehicle equipment, release and pull wiring har‐
nesses off coupling station on seat.
– Connect airbag adapter ⇒ page 334 .
Caution
If seat is lifted out of vehicle or transported, it must not, in order

to prevent damage, be gripped by attaching parts such as, e.g.
belt buckle, lever for seat longitudinal adjustment, lever for seat
height adjustment or seat trim panels.
– Use suitable means to protect attachments against damage.

– With your right hand, grasp between backrest and seat pad‐
ding, while with your left hand grasping the front edge of the
seat padding.
– Lift seat out of vehicle.
– Separate lower seat pan frames from seat pan ⇒ page 357 .
– Renew lower seat pan framed with seat longitudinal adjust‐
ment motor.
Installing
– Install lower seat pan frames to seat pan ⇒ page 357 .
– Lift seat into vehicle through front door aperture.

– Put down seat on front edge first.
– Guide seat into centring pins.
2. Front seats 333

WARNING
If, when installing a seat a thread in seat cross member mount‐

ing plate is damaged, reworking damaged threads is prohibi‐
ted! In this case, the seat cross member mounting plate must
be replaced.
If seat cross member mounting plate threads have been dam‐

aged:
– Renew seat cross member mounting plate concerned ⇒ Body
Repairs; Rep. gr. 51 .
– Remove airbag adapter - VAS 6282- .
– Engage side airbag wiring harness in coupling station.
– Depending on vehicle equipment, engage wiring harnesses in
coupling station.
– Close cover in floor covering.
WARNING
– Connect battery ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery;

Note
If airbag warning lamp - K75- indicates a fault following installation, event memory must be read, deleted and
then read again ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Torque settings
2.11 Connecting and disconnecting airbag

adapter
♦ Airbag adapter - VAS 6282-

– Connect airbag adapter - VAS 6282- to side airbag wiring har‐

ness -1-.
Caution
The airbag adapter - VAS 6282- must remain connected to the

seat until the seat is installed again.
2.12 Removing and installing seat trim on

tunnel side
Note

2. Front seats 335

Removing
– Remove spreader rivets -arrows- of trim -1-.
– To do this, press clamping pins in spreader rivets -arrows- in‐
wards.
– Lever off spreader rivets using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Detach trim -1- from mountings in seat pan.
Installing
– Insert spreader rivets -arrows- and press in clamping pins.

2.13 Removing and installing seat trim on sill

side
⇒ “2.13.1 Removing and installing seat trim on sill side, standard
ergoActive seat”, page 337
⇒ “2.13.2 Removing and installing seat trim on sill side, electrically
2.13.1 Removing and installing seat trim on sill

side, standard ergoActive seat
Note

♦ Removal and installation are described for the standard seat.

Removing
– Adjust seat to fully upright position.
2. Front seats 337

– Press in clamping pin -3-.

– Lever off spreader rivets -2- using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Open locking element -arrows- on trim -1-.
– Remove trim from bracket -5- towards front.
ergoActive seat
– Unclip wiring harness -4- from trim -1-.
– Release and pull off connectors on switches.
Installing

2.13.2 Removing and installing seat trim on sill

side, electrically adjustable seat
Note

♦ Removal and installation are described for models with seat
ventilation.

Removing
2. Front seats 339

– Press in clamping pin -3-.

– Lever off spreader rivets -2- using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Open retainer -4- on trim -1- working from bottom.
– Thread out trim -1- at rear.
– Remove trim -1- towards front from bracket -5-.
Installing

2.14 Removing and installing bracket for seat

trim
⇒ “2.14.1 Removing and installing bracket for seat trim, standard
ergoActive seat”, page 341
⇒ “2.14.2 Removing and installing bracket for seat trim, electri‐
cally adjustable seat”, page 342
2.14.1 Removing and installing bracket for seat

trim, standard ergoActive seat
Note

♦ Removal and installation are described for the standard seat.

Removing
– Guide retaining bracket -1- out of mounting -arrow-.
– Remove retaining bracket -1- from front seat.
Installing
– Make sure that retaining bracket is properly seated in mount‐
ing.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.4.1 Assembly overview - seat pan, standard seat, ergo‐
Active seat”, page 317
2. Front seats 341

2.14.2 Removing and installing bracket for seat

trim, electrically adjustable seat
Note

♦ For electrically adjustable seats with seat ventilation, the same
removal and installation procedure applies.

Removing


– Remove retaining bracket -1- from front seat.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.4.2 Assembly overview - seat pan, electrically adjustable
seat”, page 319
2.15 Removing and installing front backrest

2. Front seats 343

Removing
– Disconnect connectors of wiring harnesses leading to back‐
rest.
– Unclip clips -2- and -5- of wiring harness -1- from seat pan.
– Release wiring harness -1- together with braided sleeve from
seat pan.
– To do this, remove all cable ties -3- and -4-.
The wiring harness between coupling station and side airbag is
continuous.
– Thread wiring harness leading to side airbag out if braided
sleeve.
– To do this, remove cable ties -3- and -4-.

– Fold backrest -3- forwards onto seat pan -1-.
– Push seat pan padding to side.
– Carefully pull side airbag wiring harness -4- out of seat pan.
– Remove backrest.
Installing
– Renew any damaged cable ties and clips.
– Route wires in their original positions.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.4 Assembly overview - seat pan”, page 317
♦ ⇒ “2.3 Assembly overview - front backrest”, page 312

2.16 Removing and installing manually ad‐

justable lumbar support frame
Note
Removal and installation is described for the left seat. Apply the
same instructions for removal and installation of the right seat as
appropriate.

Removing
– Remove front seat backrest cover and padding ⇒ page 406 .
2. Front seats 345

– Unscrew bolts -3-, and detach lumbar support height adjust‐

ment mechanism from backrest frame -1-.
– Unhook lateral fasteners -6- and -5- from backrest frame -1-.
– Unhook lateral fasteners -2- and -7- from backrest frame -1-.
– Detach lumbar support frame -4- from upper mountings
-arrows-.
– Remove lumbar support frame -4- from backrest frame -1-.
Installing
Note
Before installing, check all fasteners for damage, and renew if

necessary.
Torque settings
Component Torque settings
Lumbar support frame 2 Nm

2.17 Removing and installing seat depth ad‐

justment unit
Removing
– Set seat depth adjustment as far forwards as possible.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- on trim -1- using removal wedge
- 3409- .
– Remove trim -1- from seat depth adjustment.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- on carrier from seat depth ad‐

justment using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Pull off carrier -1- with seat padding and seat cover for seat
depth adjustment upwards and towards front.
– Detach tabs -arrows- from seat depth adjustment -2-.

– Fold back carrier with seat padding and seat cover upwards.
– To do this, pull off carrier -1- with seat padding and seat cover
for seat depth adjustment upwards and simultaneously to‐
wards front.
2. Front seats 347

– Place carrier -2- with seat padding and seat cover for seat
depth adjustment onto front seat.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the lower seat pan frame is not shown.
– Detach seat cover retaining strips -1- and -4-.

– Remove beading strip -3- of seat cover from seat depth ad‐
justment.
– Pull beading strip towards front.
Caution
Risk of damage to locking lugs.

♦ Proceed with great care when unclipping and clipping in.
– To do this, unclip seat cover -1- from locking lugs -3-.
Vehicles with massage control unit - J740-

– Remove massage control unit - J740- ⇒ page 367 .
– Pull out seat depth adjustment.
– Unclip retaining lugs -1-.
– Lower bracket for massage control unit - J740- -2- in area of
retaining lugs -1-.
– Push bracket for massage control unit - J740- -2- in
– Detach bracket for massage control unit - J740- -2- from
mountings -arrows-.


– Slide seat depth adjustment towards rear.
– Counterhold on nuts -3- on seat depth adjustment while doing
so.
– Unclip locking lugs -1- and -3- using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Pull seat depth adjustment -2- upwards and towards front off
seat pan -arrows-.
– Detach tabs -4- from seat pan while doing so.
– Remove seat depth adjustment from front seat.
Installing
– Attach seat cover -1- to locking lugs -3-.

– Engage beading strip -2- in rear locking lugs -3-.
– Ensure that locking lugs are firmly engaged.
Caution

2. Front seats 349

Note
♦ The two outer bolts are provided with a plastic guide

⇒ page 326 .
♦ Ensure proper allocation.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.7 Assembly overview - seat depth adjustment”,
page 326
2.18 Removing and installing seat rake ad‐

justment unit
⇒ “2.18.1 Removing and installing seat rake adjustment, standard
⇒ “2.18.2 Removing and installing seat rake adjustment, electri‐
2.18.1 Removing and installing seat rake ad‐

justment, standard seat, ergoActive seat
Note


Removing
– Move front seat to rearmost and highest position.

– Unscrew step pin -2- and bolt -3-.
WARNING
Step pin -2- has a left-handed thread.
– Remove seat rake adjustment -1-.

Installing
WARNING
Step pin -2- has a left-handed thread.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.6.1 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, standard
2.18.2 Removing and installing seat rake ad‐

justment, electrically adjustable seat
Note


Removing
2. Front seats 351

– Unscrew bolt -2- for adjuster spindle -1- of seat rake adjust‐
ment motor (factory-set).
Caution
Risk of damage to bush -1- in the bearing location -2- (threaded

connection of adjuster spindle and seat pan).
♦ The bush cannot be renewed using workshop equipment.
♦ If the bush is damaged, the respective assembly parts
must be renewed.
– Disconnect connector -3- on seat rake adjustment motor.

– Unscrew bolts -1- and remove seat rake adjustment motor
-4-.
Installing
Torque settings
seat”, page 319
♦ ⇒ “2.6.2 Assembly overview - seat rake adjustment, electri‐

2.19 Removing and installing handle for seat

height adjustment
Note
The handle for seat height adjustment can be renewed with front
seat installed.
Removing
Note
♦ Remove handle for seat height adjustment as described. Do

not knock handle for seat height adjustment off lever.
♦ If the tab is damaged when the handle for seat height adjust‐
ment is removed, the handle cannot be refitted. The handle for
seat height adjustment has to be renewed then.
– Pull handle for seat height adjustment -1- as far as possible

upwards and hold it in this position.
– Guide a small screwdriver through handle for seat height ad‐
justment -1- and trim -2- up to catch -3-.
– Push locking lug -3- inwards using screwdriver.
– Simultaneously pull handle for seat height adjustment -1- in
-direction of arrow- off lever -4-.
Installing
– Check retaining clip -3- for damage and ensure it is properly
seated on lever -4-.
– Slide handle for seat height adjustment -1- onto lever -4- until
it engages.
– After installing, ensure that retaining clip -4- is properly en‐
gaged.
– Check firm seating by pulling on it.
2.20 Removing and installing seat height ad‐

justment unit
⇒ “2.20.1 Removing and installing seat height adjustment, stand‐
ard seat, ergoActive seat”, page 353
⇒ “2.20.2 Removing and installing seat height adjustment, elec‐
trically adjustable seat”, page 355
2.20.1 Removing and installing seat height ad‐

justment, standard seat, ergoActive seat
Note

2. Front seats 353

Removing
– Remove backrest adjuster. ⇒ page 358
– Remove handle for seat height adjustment. ⇒ page 353
– Remove lever -1-.
– Remove lock washer -1-.


– Remove seat height adjustment unit -2-.
Installing
Note
♦ Bolts -1- and bolt -3- are of different lengths.

♦ Bolt -3- is shorter.
♦ The head of bolt -3- is larger.
♦ Ensure proper allocation.
– Push down seat via backrest.
– Fit seat height adjustment -2-.

– Tighten bolts -1- and -3-
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “2.5.1 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, stand‐
ard seat, ergoActive seat”, page 322
2.20.2 Removing and installing seat height ad‐

Note


Removing
2. Front seats 355

– Disconnect connector -1- on seat height adjustment motor

-2-.
Caution
Damage to or destruction of threaded hole in seat pan.

♦ The bolt -2- has a left-hand thread.
♦ The load must be removed from the threaded connection
of the adjuster spindle and seat pan when bolt is removed
or fitted. To do this, a second mechanic must slightly press
down the seat via the backrest.
Risk of damage to bush -3- in the bearing location (threaded
connection of adjuster spindle and seat pan).
♦ The bush cannot be renewed using workshop equipment.
♦ If the bush is damaged, the respective assembly parts
must be renewed.
– Unscrew bolt -2- on adjuster spindle -1- of seat height adjust‐

ment motor.
– Unscrew bolt -1- for adjuster spindle of seat rake adjustment

motor (factory-set).
– Remove bracket with seat height adjustment motor -4- from
seat pan.


– Remove bracket -2- from seat height adjustment motor -3-.
Installing
Torque settings
seat”, page 319
♦ ⇒ “2.5.2 Assembly overview - seat height adjustment, electri‐
2.21 Removing and installing lower seat pan

frame with seat longitudinal adjustment
motor -V28- / -V31-
Removing
– If possible, move front seat to highest position to reduce as
much tension on torsion rod as possible.
– Remove front belt buckle ⇒ page 99 .
– Disconnect connector on seat longitudinal adjustment motor.
– Unclip wire from lower seat pan frame and lay it to one side.
Caution
Risk of damage to threaded holes or bushes in the bearing

locations (threaded connection of upper and lower seat pan
frame).
♦ The bolt -3- has a left-hand thread.
♦ In order to unscrew the bolts mentioned below a second
mechanic must slightly press down the seat via the back‐
rest.

– Remove seat pan -1- from lower frame -4-.
2. Front seats 357

Caution
Risk of damage to bushes -1- in the bearing locations -2-

(threaded connection of lower frame and seat pan).
♦ The bushes cannot be replaced using workshop equip‐
ment.
♦ If the bushes are damaged, renew lower seat pan frame.
Installing
Torque settings
seat”, page 319
2.22 Removing and installing backrest ad‐

justment unit
⇒ “2.22.1 Removing and installing backrest adjustment, standard
seat without through-loading function, ergoActive seat”,
page 358
⇒ “2.22.2 Removing and installing backrest adjustment, standard
seat with through-loading function”, page 359
⇒ “2.22.3 Removing and installing backrest adjustment, electri‐
2.22.1 Removing and installing backrest ad‐

justment, standard seat without through-
loading function, ergoActive seat
Note


♦ Assembly tool - 3399-

Removing
– Turn backrest adjustment -1- until a detent can be seen from
the rear -arrow A-. Use a torch if necessary.
– Insert assembly tool - 3399- and lever it in
-direction of arrow B-.
– Turn backrest adjustment 120° further.
– Insert assembly tool - 3399- and lever it in
– Remove backrest adjustment.
Installing
– Ensure correct installation position of backrest adjustment.
– Pull on backrest adjustment to ensure it is firmly seated.
– If backrest adjustment is too loose following assembly, it must
be renewed.

justment, standard seat with through-
loading function
Removing
– Unclip cover -1- on adjustment and release lever -2- using re‐
moval wedge - 3409- .
– Push retaining lugs -3- on adjustment and release lever -2-
outwards, and release them.
– Pull adjustment and release lever -2- off shaft -4-, and remove
it.
Installing
Note
Note installation position of adjustment and release lever -2-. In‐

stall adjustment and release lever -2- as shown in illustration.
2. Front seats 359


Removing
– Secure front seat on seat repair stand - VAS 6136- .
– Remove head restraint ⇒ page 363 .
– Remove front belt buckle ⇒ page 99 .
– Disconnect wiring harnesses of backrest drives on underside
of seat pan. Detach wiring harnesses from seat pan.
– Remove front backrest ⇒ page 343 .
– Detach wiring harness from backrest adjuster motor.


– Unscrew nut -2-.
– Pull transmission rod -1- out of backrest -arrow-.

– Remove backrest adjustment drive -2- from backrest frame.
Installing
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order of removal.
Specified torques
Engine bolt 7.5+1 Nm
Transfer rod nut 8±1 Nm
– Upon installation perform basic setting in “ODIS Service”.
In ODIS Service, select “Guided Fault Finding”.
After all control units have been read:
– Select “My test plan”.
– Select “Function/component selection”.
– Select “Body”.
2. Front seats 361

– “General body repairs”

– Select “01 Systems capable of self-diagnosis”.
– Select “Adjust seat on driver side”.
– Select “Functions”:
– Select “Calibrate”.
2.23 Removing and installing lumbar support

adjustment unit
♦ Removal pliers - 3392-
Note

Removing
– Pull lumbar support adjusting lever -1- off shaft -2- using re‐
moving pliers - 3392- .

Installing
– Ensure that teeth on lumbar adjusting lever -1- align with shaft
splines -2-.
– Pull on lever to ensure it is firmly seated.
– If adjusting lever is too loose following assembly, it must be
renewed.
2.24 Removing and installing head restraint

Removing
Note
♦ The head restraints can be renewed with front seat installed.

♦ The release button of the driver seat is located on outer right side in direction of travel. The release button
of the front passenger seat is located on inner left side in direction of travel.
– Move front seat to foremost and lowest position, and tilt back‐
rest by approx. 45°.
– Press padding in area of head restraint guides downwards a
little.
– Push safety catch -1- of each of the two head restraint guides
towards the holding tube as far as it will go.
– Pull head restraint out of backrest.
2. Front seats 363

Installing

guide
Removing
Right head restraint guide
– Press locking lugs inwards -arrows- and at the same time pull
head restraint guide -1- out of backrest frame -2-.
Note
Disregard -item 3-.

Left head restraint guide

– Press locking lug inwards -arrows- and at the same time pull
head restraint guide -1- out of backrest frame -2-.
Installing
Note
The head restraint guide can only be inserted in one position.
• The guide lug -3- of head restraint guide must engage in re‐
cess in backrest frame mounting.
• The locking lug must properly engage in backrest frame.
Specified torques

adjustment switch -E176- / -E177-
Note

Removing
– Remove switch -2-.
Installing
Torque settings
Bolt -1- 1 Nm

adjustment motor -V125- / -V126- / -
V129- / -V130-
2. Front seats 365

♦ Special pop rivet pliers - V.A.G 1753B-
♦ Hand drill
♦ Safety goggles
Removing
– Release and pull off connectors -1- and -2- on motors.
WARNING
Risk of eye injury.

♦ Wear safety goggles.
– Drill out rivet -3-.

– Swing lumbar support -1- at bottom towards front.
– Detach lumbar support -1- on top from backrest frame -2-
-arrows- and remove it.
Installing
– Attach lumbar support -1- on top to backrest frame -2-
-arrows- and swing toward rear at bottom.
– Rivet lumbar support to backrest frame.
Torque settings
2.28 Removing and installing seat adjust‐

ment operating unit -E470- / -E471-
Note



Removing
– Carefully lever buttons -3- and -4- out of catches on seat ad‐
justment operating unit using release tool - T10236- .
– Remove seat adjustment operating unit -1-.
Installing
Torque settings
Bolt -2- 1 Nm
2.29 Removing and installing massage con‐

trol unit - J740-
2. Front seats 367

Removing
– Unclip wiring harness -3- from retainer.
– To do this, lever off cable retainer -4- using removal wedge -
3409- .
– Release and pull off connectors -2-.
– Release massage control unit - J740- -1- from retaining tabs
-5-.
– Pull massage control unit - J740- -1- out of mountings
-arrows-.
Installing
– Renew any damaged cable ties and clips.
– Route electrical wiring so that original wiring layout is restored.
Specified torques
2.30 Removing and installing seat and steer‐

ing column adjustment control unit with
memory - J136-
Removal and installation of the seat and steering column adjust‐
ment control unit with memory - J136- are the same as for the
massage control unit - J740- .
– Removing and installing massage control unit - J740-
⇒ page 367 .
2.31 Removing and installing impact and

stabbing protector in backrest
Note
The impact and stabbing protector is installed in the seat backrest

in taxis and in vehicles for authorities.
Removing

– Pull the two bonded tabs on the sides in the upper area of the
impact and stabbing protector -1- off backrest frame -3-.
– Use release tool - T10236- to unclip push-buttons -2- from
backrest frame -3-.
– Remove impact and stabbing protector -1- from backrest
frame -3-.
Installing
Note
Before installing, check all fasteners for damage, and renew them
as necessary.
2. Front seats 369

3 Rear seats
⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats”,
page 370
⇒ “3.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest”, page 373
⇒ “3.3 Assembly overview - locking mechanism”, page 374
⇒ “3.4 Assembly overview - centre armrest”, page 375
⇒ “3.5 Assembly overview - side padding”, page 375
⇒ “3.6 Assembly overview - remote release mechanism for rear
seat backrest”, page 376
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing bench seat / individual seats”,
page 378
⇒ “3.8 Removing and installing integrated child seat”, page 382
⇒ “3.9 Removing and installing rear seat backrest”, page 383
⇒ “3.10 Removing and installing trim for locking mechanism”,
page 384
⇒ “3.11 Removing and installing locking mechanism for rear seat
backrest”, page 386
⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing cover frame for pass-through”,
page 386
⇒ “3.13 Removing and installing lid for pass-through”, page 388
⇒ “3.14 Removing and installing centre armrest”, page 389
⇒ “3.15 Removing and installing head restraint”, page 390
⇒ “3.16 Removing and installing head restraint guide”,
page 391
⇒ “3.17 Removing and installing side padding”, page 391
⇒ “3.18 Disconnecting and connecting Bowden cable for remote
release mechanism of rear seat backrest”, page 391
⇒ “3.19 Removing and installing operating handle for remote re‐
lease mechanism of rear seat backrest”, page 392
⇒ “3.20 Removing and installing Bowden cable for remote release
mechanism of rear seat backrest”, page 395
3.1 Assembly overview - bench seat / indi‐

vidual seats
⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats, with‐
out integrated child seat”, page 370
⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats, with
integrated child seat”, page 372
3.1.1 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats, without integrated child
seat

1 - Rear bench seat

parts catalogue
⇒ page 378
2 - Guide
anchor
❑ Qty. 4
⇒ page 101
3 - Cover
anchor
❑ Qty. 4
⇒ page 101
4 - Arrester
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Engages in wire frame
of rear bench seat.
5 - Mounting grommet
❑ Qty. 2
❑ For securing rear bench
seat.
❑ Clipped into underbody.
❑ Renew if damaged
3. Rear seats 371

3.1.2 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats, with integrated child seat
1 - Foot rest
❑ Clipped into child seat
⇒ page 379
2 - Child seat
parts catalogue
child seat ⇒ page 382 .
rear seat ⇒ page 379
3 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 4
❑ 8 Nm
4 - Mounting grommet
❑ Qty. 2
❑ For securing rear bench
seat.
❑ Clipped into underbody.
❑ Renew if damaged
5 - Blind rivet nut
❑ Qty. 4
parts catalogue

3.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest

parts catalogue
⇒ page 383
2 - Lock
❑ For rear seat backrest
⇒ page 374 .
3 - Outer head restraint
⇒ page 390
4 - Rear centre belt guide
❑ Renew complete belt
guide if damaged.
⇒ page 85
5 - Centre head restraint
⇒ page 390
⇒ page 391
7 - Lid
❑ For pass-through.
parts catalogue
⇒ page 388
8 - Mounting pin, inner
❑ For rear seat backrest
❑ 13.5 Nm
9 - Locking bar
❑ For centre bearing.
10 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
11 - Cover
❑ For centre bearing.
❑ Only for saloon
12 - Centre bearing
❑ Welded to underbody.
13 - Centre armrest
3. Rear seats 373

14 - Rear three-point seat belt

15 - Outer support pin
❑ Welded to body
3.3 Assembly overview - locking mechanism
Note
The assembly overview shows the locking mechanism for left rear seat back rest (1/3). The locking mechanism
for the right rear seat backrest (2/3) is similar.
1 - Backrest frame
2 - Trim for locking mechanism
⇒ page 384
3 - Locking mechanism for rear
seat backrest
⇒ page 386
4 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 23 Nm

3.4 Assembly overview - centre armrest
1 - Intermediate padding
parts catalogue
⇒ page 431
2 - Centre armrest
⇒ page 389
3 - Lid
⇒ page 388
4 - Trim
❑ For flap catch.
⇒ page 386
5 - Stop strip
❑ Clipped into rear seat
backrest.
⇒ page 386
6 - Cover frame
❑ Clipped into rear seat
backrest.
⇒ page 386
7 - Right rear seat backrest
(2/3)
❑ With pass-through.
parts catalogue
8 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Self-tapping.
❑ 12 Nm
9 - Bolt
❑ Qty. 2
❑ 8 Nm
3.5 Assembly overview - side padding

The side padding is integrated into the wheel housing trim. Side
padding and wheel housing trim form one component and cannot
be separated.
⇒ “5.7 Assembly overview - wheel housing trim”, page 216
3. Rear seats 375

3.6 Assembly overview - remote release

mechanism for rear seat backrest
3.6.1 Assembly overview - remote release

mechanism for rear seat backrest, Sa‐
loon
Note
The illustration shows the remote release mechanism for the rear
seat backrest on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror

rear seat backrest
⇒ page 392
2 - Bowden cable on vehicle
end
⇒ page 397
3 - Connecting piece
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting Bowden cable
for remote release
mechanism of rear seat
backrest ⇒ page 391
4 - Bowden cable on backrest
end
⇒ page 395
seat backrest
⇒ page 386

3.6.2 Assembly overview - remote release

mechanism for rear seat backrest, Es‐
tate
Note
The illustration shows the remote release mechanism for the rear
seat backrest on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror

rear seat backrest
⇒ page 394
2 - Bowden cable on vehicle
end
⇒ page 397
3 - Connecting piece
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting Bowden cable
for remote release
mechanism of rear seat
backrest ⇒ page 391
4 - Bowden cable on backrest
end
⇒ page 395
seat backrest
⇒ page 386
3. Rear seats 377

3.7 Removing and installing bench seat / in‐

dividual seats
⇒ “3.7.1 Removing and installing bench seat / individual seats,
without integrated child seat”, page 378
⇒ “3.7.2 Removing and installing bench seat / individual seats,
with integrated child seat”, page 379
3.7.1 Removing and installing bench seat / in‐

dividual seats, without integrated child
seat
Removing
– Unclip guides -1- for ISOFIX child seat anchor (qty. 4) from
anchors ⇒ page 102 .
– Grasp with one hand on one side under frame of rear bench
seat.
– Using both hands, pull rear bench seat -1- upwards with a firm
jerk -arrows A-. This will disengage wire hook -2- of rear bench
seat from mounting grommet -3-.
– Repeat the procedure on the other side of the rear bench seat
-arrows B-.

– Slightly lift rear bench seat -1- at front, and push wire frame
-2- towards rear out of arresters -3- -arrow-.
– Remove rear bench seat from vehicle.
Installing
– Check body apertures -arrow- for deformation.
– Repair any deformation using a plastic head hammer.
Note
Slight remaining deformations are permissible.
– Lift up floor covering -2- and press new mounting grommets

-1- into body aperture -arrow- until they engage audibly.
– Arrange floor covering around grommet as shown in illustra‐
tion.
Note
The floor covering must not cover the grommet.
– Before installing the rear bench seat, check if the wire frame
is aligned properly in the highlighted area -arrows-.
– If the wire frame is bent, it must be bent back until it is properly
aligned again.
– Fit rear bench seat and press wire hooks firmly into mounting
grommets.
– Ensure that the wire hooks are properly engaged in the mount‐
ing grommets.
3.7.2 Removing and installing bench seat / in‐

dividual seats, with integrated child seat
3. Rear seats 379

Removing
– Unclip guides -1- for ISOFIX child seat anchor (qty. 4) from
anchors ⇒ page 102 .

– Detach foot rest -1- from mountings in seat pan -arrow A- using
removal wedge - 3409- .
– Pull out foot rest -1- from mounting in seat pan -arrow B-.
– Unscrew bolts -2- from rear bench seat.

– Grasp with one hand on one side under frame of rear bench
seat.
– Using both hands, pull rear bench seat -1- upwards with a firm
jerk -arrows A-. This will disengage wire hook -2- of rear bench
seat from mounting grommet -3-.
– Repeat the procedure on the other side of the rear bench seat
-arrows B-.
3. Rear seats 381

– Slightly lift rear bench seat -1- at front, and push wire frame
-2- towards rear out of arresters -3- -arrow-.
Installing
– Check body apertures -arrow- for deformation.
– Repair any deformation using a plastic head hammer.
Note
Slight remaining deformations are permissible.
– Lift up floor covering -2- and press new mounting grommets

-1- into body aperture -arrow- until they engage audibly.
– Arrange floor covering around grommet as shown in illustra‐
tion.
Note
The floor covering must not cover the grommet.
– Before installing the rear bench seat, check if the wire frame
is aligned properly in the highlighted area -arrows-.
– If the wire frame is bent, it must be bent back until it is properly
aligned again.
– Fit rear bench seat and press wire hooks firmly into mounting
grommets.
– Ensure that the wire hooks are properly engaged in the mount‐
ing grommets.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - bench seat / individual seats,
with integrated child seat”, page 372
3.8 Removing and installing integrated child

seat

♦ Special pop rivet pliers - V.A.G 1753B-
Removing
– Remove seat cushion with integrated child seat ⇒ page 379 .
– Drill out pop rivets -2- and remove child seat -1- from rear seat
bench.
Installing
Note
Check riveted joints after assembly.
Allocation of pop rivets ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue .
3.9 Removing and installing rear seat back‐

rest
Note
For reasons of clarity, the left rear seat backrest (1/3) is not
shown.

3. Rear seats 383

Removing
– Remove rear right belt buckle with belt end fitting
⇒ page 100 .
– Separate Bowden cable for backrest release mechanism on
left and right ⇒ page 391 .
– Remove cover for centre bearing.
– Equipment version with pass-through: Open lid for pass-
through and fold it down.
– Fold up locking bar -1- at rear -arrow A-, detach it at front from
centre mount -arrow B- and remove it.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the left rear seat backrest (1/3) is not
shown.
– Lift rear seat backrest -2- out of centre mount -3- and pull it
towards centre of vehicle out of outer mountings -1- -arrows-.
Installing
– Push rear seat backrest -2- in vertical position onto outer sup‐
port pin -1-.
– Position rear seat backrest -2- in centre mount -3-.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest”, page 373
3.10 Removing and installing trim for locking

mechanism

♦ Hook - T10538-
Removing
Note
The aid of a second mechanic is recommended on account of

restricted space in the area of the “trim for locking mechanism”.
– Remove respective rear head restraint ⇒ page 390 .

– Using a screwdriver, detach beading strip on sides and on top
of backrest cover in area of trim from backrest.
– Using removal wedge - 3409- , carefully push cover next to
trim -2- towards outside.
– Using a light, determine position of respective locking tab -1-.
– Using hook - T10538- , carefully bend respective locking tab
-1- towards outside.
– After both locking tabs -1- have been bent towards outside,
pull trim upwards, and remove it -arrow-.
Installing
– After the trim has been installed, the locking mechanism must
work smoothly.
3. Rear seats 385

3.11 Removing and installing locking mech‐

anism for rear seat backrest
Removing
– Remove trim for locking mechanism ⇒ page 384 .
– Release backrest cover only in area of locking mechanism
⇒ page 425 .
– Remove Bowden cable on backrest end from release mech‐
anism -1- ⇒ page 395 .
– Remove locking mechanism -1- from backrest frame.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.3 Assembly overview - locking mechanism”, page 374
3.12 Removing and installing cover frame for

pass-through

♦ Release lever - T10039-
♦ Hook - T40207-
Removing
– Fold down centre armrest and open lid for pass-through.
– Unclip trim -1- from rear seat backrest -arrows- using removal
wedge - 3409- .
– To do this, disengage locking lugs -2- alternately using hook -
T40207- .
3. Rear seats 387

– Lever cover frame -2- off rear seat backrest -1- -arrows A- us‐
ing removal lever - T10039- .
– Start in upper left corner and proceed in
– Remove cover frame for pass-through.
– Push backrest padding and backrest cover slightly towards

side and unclip stop strip -1- for through-loader aperture lid
from rear seat backrest -arrows-.
– Remove stop strip for pass-through.
Installing
3.13 Removing and installing lid for pass-

through
Removing
– Fold down centre armrest and open lid for pass-through.


– Remove centre armrest with lid -1- for pass-through.
– Remove centre armrest ⇒ page 389 .
– Remove lower intermediate padding ⇒ page 431 .
Installing
– Fit lid -1- for pass-through with centre armrest, and tighten
bolts -2- only hand-tight.
– Close lid -1- for pass-through, and align it.
– Tighten bolts -2- on rear seat backrest.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.4 Assembly overview - centre armrest”, page 375
3.14 Removing and installing centre armrest

3. Rear seats 389

Removing
– Open lid -2- for pass-through with centre armrest by approx.
1/ .
3
– Remove centre armrest -1- from lid for pass-through.
Installing
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “3.4 Assembly overview - centre armrest”, page 375

Removing
– Press release button -3- for height adjustment on head re‐
straint guide -4- in -direction of arrow-.
– At the same time pull head restraint -1- out of rear seat back‐
rest -2- as far as stop.
– Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into opening -arrow- of

head restraint guide -1- and press in locking spring as far as
stop.
Note
The aperture in the head restraint guide -arrow- may be on »right«

or »left« as seen from direction of travel.
– At the same time pull head restraint -2- out of rear seat back‐
rest -3- and remove it.
Installing


guide
Note
Two commercially available screwdrivers with a blade height of

0.4 mm and a blade width of 8 mm are required for removal.
Removing
– Remove rear head restraint ⇒ page 390 .
– Push backrest cover and backrest padding -1- slightly down‐
wards at outer sides.
– Insert a screwdriver on both sides of head restraint guide -3-
into backrest up to locking lugs -arrows-.
Note
Position the two screwdrivers next to the locking lugs so that the
flat side of the blade rests against the locking lugs.
– Turn both screwdrivers by 90° to release locking lugs of head

restraint guide.
– Use a third screwdriver to carefully lever head restraint guide
-2- out of backrest.
Installing
3.17 Removing and installing side padding

The side padding is integrated into the wheel housing trim. Side
padding and wheel housing trim form one component and cannot
be separated.
– Removing and installing wheel housing trims ⇒ page 242 .
3.18 Disconnecting and connecting Bowden

cable for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest
Note
The separating and connecting procedures are described for the

left side of the vehicle. The separating and connecting procedures
on the right side are analogous.
3. Rear seats 391

Disconnecting
– Unclip cover -1- from rear seat backrest.
– Pull Bowden cable -1- out of cable support bracket -2-.

– Remove pin -3- of Bowden cable from mounting -4- in con‐
necting piece.
– Thread Bowden cable -1- out of rear seat backrest -arrow-.
Connecting
The Bowden cables are connected in reverse order. Observe the
following while doing so:
Note
The backrest cover must be secured all-round by cover -1-.
3.19 Removing and installing operating han‐

dle for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest
⇒ “3.19.1 Removing and installing operating handle for remote
release mechanism of rear seat backrest, Saloon”, page 392
⇒ “3.19.2 Removing and installing operating handle for remote
release mechanism of rear seat backrest, Estate”, page 394
3.19.1 Removing and installing operating han‐

dle for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest, Saloon
Note


Removing
– Unclip operating handle for remote release mechanism of rear

seat backrest -1- from top of body panel, and remove it.
– To do this, release tab -2- using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Push operating handle -1- forwards out of body panel
-arrow-.
3. Rear seats 393

Installing
3.19.2 Removing and installing operating handle for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest, Estate
Note
appropriate.
Removing
– Pull and hold operating lever to remotely release rear seat

backrest -1-.
– Unclip operating handle for remote release mechanism of rear
seat backrest -1- from luggage compartment side trim, and
swing it out -arrow A-.

– Release cable support bracket from Bowden cable -3-

-arrow B-.
– Push Bowden cable -3- out of cable support bracket of oper‐
ating handle for remote release mechanism of rear seat back‐
rest -1- -arrow C-.
– Detach pin of Bowden cable -3- from operating handle for re‐
mote release mechanism of rear seat backrest -1-.
– Remove operating handle for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest.
Installing
Note
Ensure that the cable support bracket of the Bowden cable -2- is
properly seated in the locating lugs of the operating handle for the
remote release mechanism of the rear seat backrest -1-.
Torque settings
Estate”, page 258
3.20 Removing and installing Bowden cable

for remote release mechanism of rear
seat backrest
⇒ “3.20.1 Removing and installing Bowden cable for remote re‐
lease mechanism of rear seat backrest, Bowden cable on back‐
rest end”, page 395
lease mechanism of rear seat backrest, Bowden cable on vehicle
end, Saloon”, page 397
lease mechanism of rear seat backrest, Bowden cable on vehicle
end, Estate”, page 397
3.20.1 Removing and installing Bowden cable for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest, Bowden cable on backrest end
Note
appropriate.
Removing
– Remove rear seat backrest ⇒ page 383 .
3. Rear seats 395

– Detach cover and padding only in area of Bowden cable -1-

⇒ page 425 .
– Unclip connecting piece -2- with Bowden cable -1- from back‐
rest frame -arrow A-.
– Unclip Bowden cable -1- from retainer -arrow B-.
– Push Bowden cable -1- out of cable support bracket
-arrow C- of locking mechanism for rear seat backrest -3-.
– Detach pin of Bowden cable -1- from release mechanism for
rear seat backrest -3-, and remove Bowden cable -1-.
Installing
– Attach lower Bowden cable piece in connecting element.
– Counterlock block in connecting element with a screwdriver.
By doing this, Bowden cable is secured in connecting element.
– Press upper Bowden cable piece at an angle of approx. 30° in
lock rail of locking element for rear seat backrest.
– Pull back Bowden cable with piece again as far as stop.
– Press upper securing element from Bowden cable in support
of locking element for rear seat backrest.

Further installation is carried out in reverse order.
3.20.2 Removing and installing Bowden cable

for remote release mechanism of rear
seat backrest, Bowden cable on vehicle
end, Saloon
Removing
rear seat backrest ⇒ page 392 .
– Release upper section of luggage compartment side trim
⇒ page 272 .
– Remove Bowden cable.
Installing
3.20.3 Removing and installing Bowden cable for remote release mechanism of
rear seat backrest, Bowden cable on vehicle end, Estate
Removing
rear seat backrest ⇒ page 392 .
3. Rear seats 397

– Detach Bowden cable -1- from retainers -2- on luggage com‐

partment side trim, and remove it.
Installing

74 – Seat - padding, covers

1 Front seat covers and padding
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan”, page
399
⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for backrest”, page
402
⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element”, page 403
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing cover and padding for seat pan”,
page 403
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing backrest cover and backrest pad‐
ding”, page 406
⇒ “1.6 Separating cover and padding on seat pan”, page 411
⇒ “1.7 Separating cover and padding on backrest”, page 414
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing seat heating element Z6 / Z8 ”,
page 418
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing backrest heating element Z7 / Z9
”, page 419
1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding

for seat pan
⇒ “1.1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan”,
page 399
⇒ “1.1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan,
seat depth adjustment”, page 401
1.1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan
1. Front seat covers and padding 399

1 - Seat pan
⇒ page 317 .
2 - Seat padding
parts catalogue
seat cover with seat
❑ Separating seat cover
from seat padding
⇒ page 411
3 - Upholstery clip
❑ For attaching seat cover
to seat padding
❑ When installing, fit in
same location using up‐
holstery clip pliers -
V.A.G 1634- .
4 - Seat cover
❑ Different equipment ver‐
sions.
parts catalogue
from seat padding
⇒ page 411
❑ After installation, check
that there are no crea‐
ses in seat.
5 - Channel
❑ Sewn to seat cover
❑ For attaching seat cover to upper frame of seat pan
❑ Ensure it is properly seated in upper frame of seat pan.
6 - Channel
400 Rep. gr.74 - Seat - padding, covers

1.1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan, seat depth adjustment
1 - Seat pan
⇒ page 317 .
2 - Seat padding
❑ For seat depth adjust‐
ment.
parts catalogue
from seat padding
⇒ page 411
3 - Upholstery clip
to seat padding
V.A.G 1634- .
4 - Seat cover
sions.
parts catalogue
from seat padding
⇒ page 411
that there are no creases in seat.
5 - Channel
6 - Channel
7 - Seat padding
❑ Removing and installing seat cover with seat padding ⇒ page 403
❑ Separating seat cover from seat padding ⇒ page 411

1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for backrest
1 - Upholstery clip
❑ For attaching backrest
cover to backrest cush‐
ion
V.A.G 1634- .
2 - Beading strip
❑ Sewn to backrest cover
❑ Seats with through-
loading function have a
zip fastener instead of
beading strip.
❑ Allocation “closer for zip
fastener” ⇒ Electronic
Parts Catalogue
3 - Backrest cover
sions.
parts catalogue
backrest cover with
backrest padding
⇒ page 406
cover from backrest
ses in seat.
4 - Clip
❑ For attaching backrest cover on rear backrest frame.
❑ Left and right
5 - Backrest frame
6 - Backrest padding
❑ Removing and installing backrest cover with backrest padding ⇒ page 406
❑ Separating backrest cover from backrest padding ⇒ page 414

1.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element
1 - Seat padding
parts catalogue
2 - Heater element
❑ Driver seat: heated seat
cushion for front pas‐
senger seat - Z6- .
❑ Front passenger seat:
heated seat cushion for
Z8- .
parts catalogue
⇒ page 418
parts catalogue
4 - Heater element
❑ Driver seat: heated
backrest for driver seat -
Z7- .
❑ Front passenger seat:
heated backrest for front
passenger seat - Z9- .
parts catalogue
⇒ page 419
5 - Wire
6 - Wire
1.4 Removing and installing cover and pad‐

ding for seat pan

Note
same instructions for removal and installation of right seat com‐
ponents as appropriate.
Removing
– Remove bracket for seat trim on sill side ⇒ page 341 .
– Remove backrest ⇒ page 343 .
– Release electrical connector and pull off.
– Lay wiring harnesses aside.
Vehicles with seat depth adjustment unit
– Set seat depth adjustment as far forwards as possible.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- on trim -1- using removal wedge
- 3409- .
– Remove trim from seat depth adjustment.

– Release locking lugs -arrows- on carrier from seat depth ad‐

justment using removal wedge - 3409- .
– Pull off carrier -1- with seat padding and seat cover for seat
depth adjustment upwards and towards front.
– Detach tabs -arrows- from seat depth adjustment -2-.

– Fold back carrier with seat padding and seat cover upwards.
– To do this, pull off carrier -1- with seat padding and seat cover
for seat depth adjustment upwards and simultaneously to‐
wards front.
Caution

– Place carrier -2- with seat padding and seat cover for seat
depth adjustment onto front seat.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the lower seat pan frame is not shown.
– Detach seat cover retaining strips -1- and -4-.

– Remove beading strip -3- of seat cover from seat depth ad‐
justment.
– To do this, pull beading strip towards front.
– Detach beading strips -1- and -2- using front-end hook - 3370- .
– Remove padding and cover from seat pan.
– Separate cover from padding ⇒ page 411 .
Installing
Torque settings

1.5 Removing and installing backrest cover

and backrest padding
Note

♦ Upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G 1634-
Removing, backrest cover made of fabric
Note
In vehicles with fabric covers, the front seat does not need to be
removed.

– If fitted, remove mounting for “Rear Seat Entertainment” ⇒

Communication; Rep. gr. 91 ; Rear Seat Entertainment Sys‐
tem (RSE) .
– If fitted, remove lumbar support adjusting lever ⇒ page 362 .
Driver seat and front passenger seat with backrest which folds
down completely
– Open beading strip -4- using front-end hook - 3370- .
Front passenger seat with backrest which folds down completely
A zip fastener is installed instead of the beading strip -4-.
Allocation “closer for zip fastener” ⇒ Electronic Parts Catalogue
– Open zip fastener.
Continuation for all seats
– Roll backrest cover -1- upwards at front and rear.
– Pull backrest cover -1- upwards in order to gain access to the
upholstery clips -5- on left and right.
– Open upholstery clips -5- using pliers -6-.

– Pull backrest cover -1- on padding -7- upwards.

– Pull backrest cover -1- further upwards in order to gain access
to the upholstery clips -5-.
– Detach clip -3- from backrest frame -2- on both sides at the
rear.
– Use removal wedge - 3409- for this.
– Open upholstery clips -5- on backside.
Note
The uppermost retaining clips need not be removed.

– Pull backrest cover on backside upwards up to cross bar -2-.

– Detach cross piece on left and right from backrest frame
-arrows-.
– On heated front seats, disconnect and guide out wiring har‐
ness from below backrest frame.
– Thread out backrest cover and backrest padding on head re‐
straint locking mechanism.
– Remove backrest cover and backrest padding from backrest.
Installing, backrest cover made of fabric
– If necessary, install backrest heating element ⇒ page 419 .
– Fit backrest cover on backrest padding ⇒ page 414 .
Removing, backrest cover made of leather or having leather ele‐
ments
WARNING
Observe general safety regulations when working on airbag,

belt tensioner and battery isolator units (pyrotechnic compo‐
nents) ⇒ page 1 .
Note
If the front passenger seat has a backrest which folds down com‐
pletely, the removal procedure described below does not need to
be carried out.

– If fitted, remove mounting for Rear Seat Entertainment ⇒
Communication; Rep. gr. 91 ; Rear Seat Entertainment Sys‐
tem (RSE) .
– Unclip caps ⇒ Item 2 (page 312) of head restraint locking
mechanism using removal wedge - 3409- .
– If fitted, remove lumbar support adjusting lever ⇒ page 362 .

Driver seat and front passenger seat with backrest which folds
down completely
– Open beading strip -4- using front-end hook - 3370- .
Front passenger seat with backrest which folds down completely
A zip fastener is installed instead of the beading strip -4-.
– Open zip fastener.
Continuation for all seats
– Roll backrest cover -1- upwards at front and rear.
– Pull backrest cover -1- upwards in order to gain access to the
upholstery clips -5- on left and right.
– Open upholstery clips -5- using pliers -6-.
– Pull backrest cover -1- on padding -7- upwards.
– Detach clip -3- from backrest frame -2- on both sides at the
rear.
– Use removal wedge - 3409- for this.
– Open upholstery clips -5- on backside.


Note
The uppermost retaining clips need not be removed.
– Pull backrest cover on backside upwards up to cross bar -2-.

– Detach cross piece on left and right from backrest frame
-arrows-.
– Thread out backrest cover and backrest padding on head re‐
straint locking mechanism.
– Remove backrest cover and backrest padding from backrest.
– Thread out wiring harness while doing so.
Installing, backrest cover made of leather or having leather ele‐
ments
– If necessary, install backrest heating element ⇒ page 419 .
– Fit backrest cover on backrest padding ⇒ page 414 .
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - cover and padding for backrest”,
page 402
1.6 Separating cover and padding on seat

pan

Removing
– Remove cover and padding ⇒ page 403 .
Vehicles with seat depth adjustment unit
– Unclip beading strips -2- from locking lugs -5-.
– Detach seat cover from tabs -4- on both sides using front-end
hook - 3370- .
– Remove carrier -3- with seat padding and seat depth adjust‐
ment from seat cover -1-.

– Pull retaining tab -3- of seat cover -1- in -direction of arrow- off
seat padding -2-.

– Pull seat cover -1- off seat padding -2-.

– Cut through upholstery clips -3- using pliers -4-.
Installing
• Renew all opened retaining clips ⇒ Item 1 (page 402) and fit
them in the same positions.
– Pull seat cover -1- over padding -4-.

– Secure seat cover -1- with upholstery clips -2- in mountings

-3-.
– Use upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G 1634- for this.
– Ensure that seat cover -1- is free of creases.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan”,
page 399
1.7 Separating cover and padding on back‐

rest
Note


Removing, backrest cover made of fabric
Note
♦ In vehicles with fabric covers, the front seat does not need to
be removed.
♦ On vehicles with fabric covers, the backrest does not need to
be removed from the seat pan.
– Remove backrest cover and cushion ⇒ page 406 .

– Open upper upholstery clips using pliers, and remove them.
– Pull backrest cover off backrest padding.
Installing, backrest cover made of fabric

– Pull backrest cover -1- over padding -4-.

– Thread in backrest cover -1- on head restraint guide
⇒ Item 1 (page 312) .
– Secure backrest cover -1- with upholstery clips -2- in mount‐
ings -3-.
– Ensure that backrest cover -1- is free of creases.
Removing, backrest cover made of leather or having leather ele‐
ments
Note
If the front passenger seat has a backrest which folds down com‐
pletely, the removal procedure described below does not need to
be carried out.

– Remove backrest cover and cushion ⇒ page 406 .

– Open upper upholstery clips using pliers, and remove them.

– Pull backrest cover off backrest padding.
Installing, backrest cover made of leather or having leather ele‐
ments
– Pull backrest cover -1- over padding -4-.

– Thread in backrest cover -1- on head restraint guide
⇒ Item 1 (page 312) .
– Secure backrest cover -1- with upholstery clips -2- in mount‐
ings -3-.
– Ensure that backrest cover -1- is free of creases.
Torque settings
page 402


1.8 Removing and installing seat heating el‐

ement -Z6- / -Z8-
♦ Hot air blower, commercially available
WARNING
It is not permissible to bond a new seat heating element over

the old, defective one.
Removing
– Separate seat cover from seat padding ⇒ page 411 .
• Hot air blower setting: 220°C
– Heat up defective heating element in area of bond, maintaining
a distance of approx. 300 mm between the hot air blower and
padding.
– Grip heater element in area of adhesive strip and carefully de‐
tach while continually applying heat.
– When doing this, slowly and carefully pull off heater element
at a sharp angle.
– While applying hot air, detach adhesive surfaces of heater el‐
ement one by one.
– Make sure that no padding particles are torn out. Small torn
out pigments are permissible.
Note
Adhesive residue from the detective heater element can remain

on the foam.
Installing
There are grooved recesses in the padding in which the wires run.
The cover is attached to the wires using upholstery clips.
Note
♦ When bonding the heater element, ensure that the heater el‐
ement comes fully into contact with the padding in the grooved
recesses.
♦ Ensure that the heater element is not creased or stretched on
the padding when doing so.
– Bond on heater element centrally and without creases, re‐

move wax strip of adhesive completely.
– Do not detach heater element to adjust bond position.

Caution
In the event of the bond requiring repositioning, a new heater

element must be used.
Torque settings
♦ ⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for seat pan”,
page 399
♦ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element”, page 403
1.9 Removing and installing backrest heat‐

ing element -Z7- / -Z9-
WARNING

Removing
– Separate backrest cover from backrest padding ⇒ page 414 .
padding.
at a sharp angle.
ement one by one.
Note

on the foam.
Installing

Note
recesses.

Caution

Torque settings
page 402
♦ ⇒ “1.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element”, page 403

2 Rear seat covers and padding

⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for bench seat”,
page 421
⇒ “2.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest cover and pad‐
ding”, page 423
⇒ “2.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element”, page 424
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing bench seat cover and padding”,
page 424
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing rear seat backrest cover and pad‐
ding”, page 425
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing cover and padding for squab with
integrated child seat”, page 427
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing push button with trim for adjusting
mechanism of child seat”, page 429
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing intermediate padding, backrest
with pass-through”, page 431
⇒ “2.9 Separating cover and padding for rear bench seat”,
page 431
⇒ “2.10 Separating cover and padding for rear seat backrest”,
page 432
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing seat heating element”,
page 432
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing backrest heating element”, page
433
2.1 Assembly overview - cover and padding for bench seat
2. Rear seat covers and padding 421

1 - Seat frame
2 - Seat padding
parts catalogue
seat cover and seat
from seat padding
⇒ page 431
3 - Upholstery clip
to seat padding
V.A.G 1634- .
4 - Seat cover
sions.
parts catalogue
seat cover and seat
from seat padding
⇒ page 431
ses in seat.
5 - Channel
❑ For attaching seat cover to seat frame.

2.2 Assembly overview - rear seat backrest cover and padding
1 - Backrest cover
sions.
parts catalogue
backrest cover with
backrest padding
⇒ page 425
cover from backrest
ses in seat.
2 - Upholstery clip
❑ For attaching backrest
cover to backrest cush‐
ion
V.A.G 1634- .
parts catalogue
backrest cover with
backrest padding
⇒ page 425
cover from backrest
4 - Backrest frame
5 - Beading strips
❑ Sewn to backrest cover
❑ For attaching backrest cover to backrest frame.

2.3 Assembly overview - seat heating element
Note
Illustration shows the seat heating elements on the left side. The right-hand side is similar (mirror image of left-
hand side).
1 - Heater element
❑ For leg support
⇒ page 432
parts catalogue
2 - Heater element for bench
seat
❑ Heated bench seat
cushion for rear left seat
- Z10-
❑ Heated bench seat
cushion for rear right
seat - Z12-
⇒ page 432
parts catalogue
parts catalogue
4 - Heater element for rear seat
backrest
❑ Heated backrest for rear
left seat - Z11-
❑ Heated backrest for rear
right seat - Z13-
⇒ page 433
parts catalogue
5 - Wire
6 - Seat padding
2.4 Removing and installing bench seat

cover and padding
Removing

– Detach beading -3- of seat cover all round from seat frame.
– Detach beading -1- of seat cover from belt buckle openings.
– Remove seat cover -2- with seat padding from seat frame.
Caution
Do not damage seat cover.

♦ Do not pull on seat cover. Otherwise the seat cover might
be torn apart.
Installing
– After installation, check that there are no creases in the seat
cover.
2.5 Removing and installing rear seat back‐

rest cover and padding
♦ Wedges - T10383-
Removing
– Remove rear seat backrest ⇒ page 383 .
– Remove rear head restraint ⇒ page 390 .
– Remove trim for locking mechanism ⇒ page 384 .
– Remove net partition mounting on right rear seat backrest
(2/3) ⇒ page 34 .

– Release clips -2- in area of inner support pin from backrest

cover -1-.
Left rear seat backrest (1/3)

– Starting at locking mechanism, lever beading strip -2- for back‐
rest cover all round off backrest frame -3- -arrow- using a
screwdriver.
– Remove rear head restraint guides ⇒ page 391 .
– Remove backrest cover -1- with backrest padding from back‐
rest frame.
Right rear seat backrest (2/3) without pass-through

– Remove rear centre belt guide ⇒ page 85 .
screwdriver.
rest frame.

Right rear seat backrest (2/3) with pass-through

– Remove rear centre belt guide ⇒ page 85 .
– Remove lid for pass-through with rear centre armrest
⇒ page 388 .
– Remove cover frame for pass-through ⇒ page 386 .
screwdriver.
– Lever beading strip -4- for backrest cover all round off pass-
through using a screwdriver.
rest frame.
Installing
– Fold beading strip -1- 90° inwards -arrow A-.
– Attach side beading strips into grooves in backrest frame
-arrow B-.
– Attach fastening frame into backrest frame in area of head re‐
straint.
2.6 Removing and installing cover and pad‐

ding for squab with integrated child seat
Removing
– Remove child seat ⇒ page 382 .

– Detach clamp strip -2- from trim.

– Detach clamp strip -3- on both sides of child seat adjusting
unit.
– Remove all upholstery clips -5- on both sides and from rear.
– Unhook cover -1- from attachments -4-.
– Roll up cover -1- over padding -4- until upholstery clips -2- and
-3- are accessible.
Note
The outer upholstery clips -3- are joined to the child seat adjusting unit -5-.
– Remove all upholstery clips -2- and -3-.

– Remove cover -1- and padding -4- from child seat adjusting
unit -5-.

Installing
– Installation is carried out in reverse order.
Note
Use upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G 1634- to fit upholstery clips.
2.7 Removing and installing push button

with trim for adjusting mechanism of
child seat
Removing
– Remove child seat ⇒ page 382 .
– Remove cover and padding of integrated child seat
⇒ page 427 .

– Slide transfer element -2- forwards -arrow- and detach from

push-button -1-.
– Push together detent hooks -3- and detach push-button with
moulding from child seat adjusting unit.
Installing
– Installation is carried out in reverse order.

2.8 Removing and installing intermediate

padding, backrest with pass-through
Removing
– Fold down lid for pass-through.
– Release locking lugs -1- using a screwdriver and at the same
time push down intermediate padding -2- as far as stop
-arrow A-.
– Slightly lift up intermediate padding -arrow B- on top and at the
same time detach it at bottom from lid for pass-through
-arrow C-.
Installing
2.9 Separating cover and padding for rear

bench seat
Removing
– Remove cover and padding for rear bench seat ⇒ page 424 .
– Pull seat cover -3- as far as possible off seat padding -2-.
– Cut through upholstery clips -1- using pliers.
– Separate seat cover from seat padding.
Installing
cover.

2.10 Separating cover and padding for rear

seat backrest
Removing
– Remove backrest cover with backrest cushion from rear seat
backrest ⇒ page 425 .
– Pull backrest cover -3- as far as possible off backrest padding
-2-.
– Cut through upholstery clips -1- using pliers.
Installing
cover.
2.11 Removing and installing seat heating el‐

ement
WARNING

Removing
padding.
at a sharp angle.
ement one by one.

Note

on the foam.
Installing
Note
recesses.

Caution

– Separate cover and padding for bench seat ⇒ page 431 .
2.12 Removing and installing backrest heat‐

ing element
WARNING

Removing
padding.
at a sharp angle.
ement one by one.

Note

on the foam.
Installing
Note
recesses.

Caution

– Separate cover and padding for rear seat backrest

⇒ page 432 .

VW Passat b8 Body Repairs Interior Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VW Passat b8 Body Repairs Interior Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Service Department. Technical Information

2.10 Removing and installing bracket for roof grab handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

7.1 Assembly overview - front passenger side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

70 - Trim, insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

5.2 Assembly overview - sill panel moulding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

72 - Seat frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

2.11 Connecting and disconnecting airbag adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

74 - Seat - padding, covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

1.8 Removing and installing seat heating element Z6 / Z8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

⇒ “1.1 Safety measures when working on vehicles with a start/

1.1 Safety measures when working on ve‐

Risk of injury due to automatic engine starting in vehicles with

2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

1.2 Safety measures when working with py‐

The following are pyrotechnic components:

♦ When connecting pyrotechnic components of the restraint

1.3 Storage, transportation and disposal of

4 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

♦ This does not apply to belt tensioners which are operated

1.4 Additional safety regulations for side air‐

1.5 Additional safety instructions for curtain

♦ After body repairs in vicinity of curtain airbag, check body for

1.6 Safety regulations for crash sensors

1.7 Renewing pyrotechnic, electrical and

6 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

♦ In the event of damage to the housing

– If parts of the belt system are removed because of an accident,

1.8 Checking airbag securing parts after an

1.9 Accident without airbag triggering

1.10 Checking seat belts

The seat belt system must be inspected systematically after

8 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

♦ Check inertia reel (locking mechanism) ⇒ page 10 .

If the customer refuses to have a damaged seat belt renewed,

1.11 Check belt webbing

• If either of the types of damage illustrated below (1 and 2) are

1.12 Checking inertia reel (locking mecha‐

For safety reasons, the road test should be carried out on a

– Put on seat belt.

10 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

1.13 Visually checking belt buckle

1.14 Check operation of belt buckle

Under no circumstances whatsoever may lubricant be used to

1.15 Checking belt relays, and buckle

1.16 Checking securing parts and anchorage

1.17 Checking seat belt restraint function for

1.18 Checking child seat anchors after an ac‐

12 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

2.1 Contact corrosion

2.2 Pipe/wire routing and attachment

1.1 Overview of fitting locations - storage compartments/covers

14 Rep. gr.68 - Interior equipment

1.2 Assembly overview - driver side dash panel cover

16 Rep. gr.68 - Interior equipment

1.3 Assembly overview - steering column trim

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

1.4 Assembly overview - glove compartment

18 Rep. gr.68 - Interior equipment

1.5 Assembly overview - storage compartment in headliner

1.6 Removing and installing dash panel

– Switch off ignition.

Before installing, check all fasteners for damage and renew if